1 |
%% TeX macros to handle texinfo files |
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files. |
2 |
|
% |
3 |
% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 1994 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex. |
4 |
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi |
5 |
%This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or |
% |
6 |
%modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as |
\def\texinfoversion{1999-01-05}% |
7 |
%published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at |
% |
8 |
%your option) any later version. |
% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98 |
9 |
|
% Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
10 |
%This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be |
% |
11 |
%useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty |
% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or |
12 |
%of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU |
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as |
13 |
%General Public License for more details. |
% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at |
14 |
|
% your option) any later version. |
15 |
%You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
% |
16 |
%along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write |
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be |
17 |
%to the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, |
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty |
18 |
%USA. |
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU |
19 |
|
% General Public License for more details. |
20 |
|
% |
21 |
%In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. |
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License |
22 |
%You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve |
% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write |
23 |
%what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! |
% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
24 |
|
% Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. |
25 |
% This automatically updates the version number based on RCS. |
% |
26 |
\def\deftexinfoversion$#1: #2 ${\def\texinfoversion{#2}} |
% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program. |
27 |
\deftexinfoversion$Revision$ |
% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve |
28 |
\message{Loading texinfo package [Version \texinfoversion]:} |
% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding! |
29 |
|
% |
30 |
% Print the version number if in a .fmt file. |
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug |
31 |
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}\message{}} |
% reports; you can get the latest version from: |
32 |
|
% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/texinfo.tex |
33 |
|
% /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines. |
34 |
|
% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html) |
35 |
|
% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex |
36 |
|
% ftp://ctan.org/macros/texinfo/texinfo.tex |
37 |
|
% (and all CTAN mirrors, finger ctan@ctan.org for a list). |
38 |
|
% The texinfo.tex in the texinfo distribution itself could well be out |
39 |
|
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check. |
40 |
|
% |
41 |
|
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. |
42 |
|
% Please include a precise test case in each bug report, |
43 |
|
% including a complete document with which we can reproduce the problem. |
44 |
|
% |
45 |
|
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the |
46 |
|
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For simple |
47 |
|
% manuals, however, you can get away with: |
48 |
|
% tex foo.texi |
49 |
|
% texindex foo.?? |
50 |
|
% tex foo.texi |
51 |
|
% tex foo.texi |
52 |
|
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever, to process the dvi file. |
53 |
|
% The extra runs of TeX get the cross-reference information correct. |
54 |
|
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more |
55 |
|
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary. |
56 |
|
|
57 |
|
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:} |
58 |
|
|
59 |
|
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number |
60 |
|
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because |
61 |
|
% they might have appeared in the input file name. |
62 |
|
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}% |
63 |
|
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active} |
64 |
|
|
65 |
% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. |
% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine. |
66 |
|
|
|
\let\ptextilde=\~ |
|
|
\let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
|
|
\let\ptexrbrace=\} |
|
|
\let\ptexdots=\dots |
|
|
\let\ptexdot=\. |
|
|
\let\ptexstar=\* |
|
|
\let\ptexend=\end |
|
|
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet |
|
67 |
\let\ptexb=\b |
\let\ptexb=\b |
68 |
|
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet |
69 |
\let\ptexc=\c |
\let\ptexc=\c |
70 |
|
\let\ptexcomma=\, |
71 |
|
\let\ptexdot=\. |
72 |
|
\let\ptexdots=\dots |
73 |
|
\let\ptexend=\end |
74 |
|
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv |
75 |
|
\let\ptexexclam=\! |
76 |
\let\ptexi=\i |
\let\ptexi=\i |
77 |
|
\let\ptexlbrace=\{ |
78 |
|
\let\ptexrbrace=\} |
79 |
|
\let\ptexstar=\* |
80 |
\let\ptext=\t |
\let\ptext=\t |
|
\let\ptexl=\l |
|
|
\let\ptexL=\L |
|
81 |
|
|
82 |
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo. |
83 |
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space |
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign. |
84 |
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and |
\let\+ = \relax |
85 |
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the |
|
|
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. |
|
|
{\catcode`@ = 11 |
|
|
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\@M\ } |
|
|
} |
|
|
\let\~ = \tie % And make it available as @~. |
|
86 |
|
|
87 |
\message{Basics,} |
\message{Basics,} |
88 |
\chardef\other=12 |
\chardef\other=12 |
91 |
% starts a new line in the output. |
% starts a new line in the output. |
92 |
\newlinechar = `^^J |
\newlinechar = `^^J |
93 |
|
|
94 |
% Set up fixed words for English. |
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set. |
95 |
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined{\gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi |
96 |
\def\putwordInfo{Info}% |
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi |
97 |
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined{\gdef\putwordSee{See}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi |
98 |
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined{\gdef\putwordsee{see}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi |
99 |
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined{\gdef\putwordfile{file}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi |
100 |
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined{\gdef\putwordpage{page}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi |
101 |
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined{\gdef\putwordsection{section}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi |
102 |
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined{\gdef\putwordSection{Section}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi |
103 |
\ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi |
104 |
\ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined{\gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi |
105 |
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined{\gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}}\fi% |
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi |
106 |
|
\ifx\putwordShortContents\undefined \gdef\putwordShortContents{Short Contents}\fi |
107 |
|
\ifx\putwordTableofContents\undefined\gdef\putwordTableofContents{Table of Contents}\fi |
108 |
|
|
109 |
% Ignore a token. |
% Ignore a token. |
110 |
% |
% |
113 |
\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} |
\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix} |
114 |
\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} |
\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers} |
115 |
\hyphenation{eshell} |
\hyphenation{eshell} |
116 |
|
\hyphenation{white-space} |
117 |
|
|
118 |
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. |
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages. |
119 |
\newdimen \bindingoffset \bindingoffset=0pt |
\newdimen \bindingoffset |
120 |
\newdimen \normaloffset \normaloffset=\hoffset |
\newdimen \normaloffset |
121 |
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight |
|
\pagewidth=\hsize \pageheight=\vsize |
|
122 |
|
|
123 |
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file |
124 |
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, |
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here, |
125 |
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. |
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. |
126 |
% |
% |
127 |
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% |
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}% |
128 |
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined |
129 |
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 |
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2 |
130 |
\tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 |
\tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 |
131 |
\tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 |
\tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 |
132 |
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen |
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen |
133 |
}% |
}% |
134 |
|
\else |
135 |
|
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2 |
136 |
|
\tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1 |
137 |
|
\tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1 |
138 |
|
\tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1 |
139 |
|
\tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2 |
140 |
|
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen |
141 |
|
}% |
142 |
|
\fi |
143 |
|
|
144 |
%---------------------Begin change----------------------- |
% For @cropmarks command. |
145 |
% |
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks. |
146 |
%%%% For @cropmarks command. |
% |
147 |
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 |
\newif\ifcropmarks |
148 |
|
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue |
149 |
% |
% |
150 |
\newdimen\cornerlong \newdimen\cornerthick |
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners. |
151 |
\newdimen \topandbottommargin |
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986 |
|
\newdimen \outerhsize \newdimen \outervsize |
|
|
\cornerlong=1pc\cornerthick=.3pt % These set size of cropmarks |
|
|
\outerhsize=7in |
|
|
%\outervsize=9.5in |
|
|
% Alternative @smallbook page size is 9.25in |
|
|
\outervsize=9.25in |
|
|
\topandbottommargin=.75in |
|
152 |
% |
% |
153 |
%---------------------End change----------------------- |
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines |
154 |
|
\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc |
155 |
|
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt |
156 |
|
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in |
157 |
|
|
158 |
|
% Main output routine. |
159 |
|
\chardef\PAGE = 255 |
160 |
|
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} |
161 |
|
|
162 |
|
\newbox\headlinebox |
163 |
|
\newbox\footlinebox |
164 |
|
|
165 |
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents |
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents |
166 |
% does insertions itself, but you have to call it yourself. |
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself. |
167 |
\chardef\PAGE=255 \output={\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}} |
\def\onepageout#1{% |
168 |
\def\onepageout#1{\hoffset=\normaloffset |
\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi |
169 |
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset |
% |
170 |
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi |
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset |
171 |
{\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files. |
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi |
172 |
\shipout\vbox{{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline} \pagebody{#1}% |
% |
173 |
{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}}}% |
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in |
174 |
\advancepageno \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi} |
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code). |
175 |
|
\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}% |
176 |
%%%% For @cropmarks command %%%% |
\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}% |
177 |
|
% |
178 |
% Here is a modification of the main output routine for Near East Publications |
{% |
179 |
% This provides right-angle cropmarks at all four corners. |
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to |
180 |
% The contents of the page are centerlined into the cropmarks, |
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends |
181 |
% and any desired binding offset is added as an \hskip on either |
% before the \shipout runs. |
182 |
% site of the centerlined box. (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
% |
183 |
% |
\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files. |
184 |
\def\croppageout#1{\hoffset=0pt % make sure this doesn't mess things up |
\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output. |
185 |
{\escapechar=`\\\relax % makes sure backslash is used in output files. |
\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if |
186 |
\shipout |
% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example. |
187 |
\vbox to \outervsize{\hsize=\outerhsize |
\shipout\vbox{% |
188 |
\vbox{\line{\ewtop\hfill\ewtop}} |
\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup |
189 |
\nointerlineskip |
\hsize = \outerhsize |
190 |
\line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop} |
\vskip-\topandbottommargin |
191 |
\hfill |
\vtop to0pt{% |
192 |
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}} |
\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}% |
193 |
\vskip \topandbottommargin |
\nointerlineskip |
194 |
\centerline{\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi |
\line{% |
195 |
\vbox{ |
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}% |
196 |
{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline} |
\hfill |
197 |
\pagebody{#1} |
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}% |
198 |
{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}} |
}% |
199 |
\ifodd\pageno\else\hskip\bindingoffset\fi} |
\vss}% |
200 |
\vskip \topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill |
\vskip\topandbottommargin |
201 |
\boxmaxdepth\cornerthick |
\line\bgroup |
202 |
\line{\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot} |
\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize. |
203 |
\hfill |
\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi |
204 |
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}} |
\vbox\bgroup |
205 |
\nointerlineskip |
\fi |
206 |
\vbox{\line{\ewbot\hfill\ewbot}} |
% |
207 |
}} |
\unvbox\headlinebox |
208 |
|
\pagebody{#1}% |
209 |
|
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt |
210 |
|
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty. |
211 |
|
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.) |
212 |
|
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect. |
213 |
|
\vskip 2\baselineskip |
214 |
|
\unvbox\footlinebox |
215 |
|
\fi |
216 |
|
% |
217 |
|
\ifcropmarks |
218 |
|
\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup |
219 |
|
\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup |
220 |
|
\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill |
221 |
|
\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick |
222 |
|
\vbox to0pt{\vss |
223 |
|
\line{% |
224 |
|
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}% |
225 |
|
\hfill |
226 |
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}% |
227 |
|
}% |
228 |
|
\nointerlineskip |
229 |
|
\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}% |
230 |
|
}% |
231 |
|
\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause |
232 |
|
\fi |
233 |
|
}% end of \shipout\vbox |
234 |
|
}% end of group with \turnoffactive |
235 |
\advancepageno |
\advancepageno |
236 |
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi} |
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi |
237 |
% |
} |
|
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks |
|
|
\def\cropmarks{\let\onepageout=\croppageout } |
|
238 |
|
|
239 |
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen |
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen |
240 |
|
|
249 |
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} |
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi} |
250 |
} |
} |
251 |
|
|
|
% |
|
252 |
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are |
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are |
253 |
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize |
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize |
254 |
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986) |
343 |
%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) |
%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup) |
344 |
\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} |
\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi} |
345 |
\def\ENVcheck{% |
\def\ENVcheck{% |
346 |
\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment. Type Return to continue.} |
\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue} |
347 |
\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage |
\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage |
348 |
|
|
349 |
% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now. |
% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now. |
350 |
\newhelp\EMsimple{Type <Return> to continue.} |
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.} |
351 |
|
|
352 |
\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} |
\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx} |
353 |
|
|
406 |
|
|
407 |
% @@ prints an @ |
% @@ prints an @ |
408 |
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). |
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr). |
409 |
\def\@{{\tt \char '100}} |
\def\@{{\tt\char64}} |
410 |
|
|
411 |
% This is turned off because it was never documented |
% This is turned off because it was never documented |
412 |
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. |
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures. |
416 |
%\def\'{{'}} |
%\def\'{{'}} |
417 |
|
|
418 |
% Used to generate quoted braces. |
% Used to generate quoted braces. |
419 |
|
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}} |
420 |
\def\mylbrace {{\tt \char '173}} |
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}} |
|
\def\myrbrace {{\tt \char '175}} |
|
421 |
\let\{=\mylbrace |
\let\{=\mylbrace |
422 |
\let\}=\myrbrace |
\let\}=\myrbrace |
423 |
|
\begingroup |
424 |
|
% Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index. |
425 |
|
\catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12 |
426 |
|
\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2 |
427 |
|
\catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12 |
428 |
|
@gdef@lbracecmd[\{]% |
429 |
|
@gdef@rbracecmd[\}]% |
430 |
|
@endgroup |
431 |
|
|
432 |
|
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent |
433 |
|
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H. |
434 |
|
\let\, = \c |
435 |
|
\let\dotaccent = \. |
436 |
|
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}} |
437 |
|
\let\tieaccent = \t |
438 |
|
\let\ubaraccent = \b |
439 |
|
\let\udotaccent = \d |
440 |
|
|
441 |
|
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown |
442 |
|
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss. |
443 |
|
\def\questiondown{?`} |
444 |
|
\def\exclamdown{!`} |
445 |
|
|
446 |
|
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents. |
447 |
|
\def\imacro{i} |
448 |
|
\def\jmacro{j} |
449 |
|
\def\dotless#1{% |
450 |
|
\def\temp{#1}% |
451 |
|
\ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi |
452 |
|
\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j |
453 |
|
\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}% |
454 |
|
\fi\fi |
455 |
|
} |
456 |
|
|
457 |
|
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space |
458 |
|
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space |
459 |
|
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and |
460 |
|
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the |
461 |
|
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph. |
462 |
|
{\catcode`@ = 11 |
463 |
|
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble |
464 |
|
% if the definition is written into an index file. |
465 |
|
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M |
466 |
|
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ } |
467 |
|
} |
468 |
|
|
469 |
% @: forces normal size whitespace following. |
% @: forces normal size whitespace following. |
470 |
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } |
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 } |
475 |
% @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
% @. is an end-of-sentence period. |
476 |
\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } |
\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 } |
477 |
|
|
|
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. |
|
|
\gdef\enddots{$\mathinner{\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp\ldotp}$\spacefactor=3000} |
|
|
|
|
478 |
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. |
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang. |
479 |
\gdef\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } |
\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 } |
480 |
|
|
481 |
% @? is an end-of-sentence query. |
% @? is an end-of-sentence query. |
482 |
\gdef\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } |
\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 } |
483 |
|
|
484 |
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the |
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the |
485 |
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would |
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would |
563 |
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally |
564 |
%% if the depth of the box does not fit. |
%% if the depth of the box does not fit. |
565 |
%{\baselineskip=0pt% |
%{\baselineskip=0pt% |
566 |
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\penalty 10000 |
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak |
567 |
%\prevdepth=-1000pt |
%\prevdepth=-1000pt |
568 |
%}} |
%}} |
569 |
|
|
604 |
|
|
605 |
\let\br = \par |
\let\br = \par |
606 |
|
|
607 |
% @dots{} output some dots |
% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font. |
608 |
|
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter |
609 |
|
% font as three actual period characters. |
610 |
|
% |
611 |
|
\def\dots{% |
612 |
|
\leavevmode |
613 |
|
\hbox to 1.5em{% |
614 |
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil |
615 |
|
.\hss.\hss.% |
616 |
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil |
617 |
|
}% |
618 |
|
} |
619 |
|
|
620 |
|
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis. |
621 |
|
% |
622 |
|
\def\enddots{% |
623 |
|
\leavevmode |
624 |
|
\hbox to 2em{% |
625 |
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil |
626 |
|
.\hss.\hss.\hss.% |
627 |
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil |
628 |
|
}% |
629 |
|
\spacefactor=3000 |
630 |
|
} |
631 |
|
|
|
\def\dots{$\ldots$} |
|
632 |
|
|
633 |
% @page forces the start of a new page |
% @page forces the start of a new page |
634 |
|
% |
635 |
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} |
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject} |
636 |
|
|
637 |
% @exdent text.... |
% @exdent text.... |
650 |
\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount |
\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount |
651 |
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} |
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}} |
652 |
|
|
653 |
|
% @inmargin{TEXT} puts TEXT in the margin next to the current paragraph. |
654 |
|
|
655 |
|
\def\inmargin#1{% |
656 |
|
\strut\vadjust{\nobreak\kern-\strutdepth |
657 |
|
\vtop to \strutdepth{\baselineskip\strutdepth\vss |
658 |
|
\llap{\rightskip=\inmarginspacing \vbox{\noindent #1}}\null}}} |
659 |
|
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm |
660 |
|
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox} |
661 |
|
|
662 |
%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} |
%\hbox{{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}} |
663 |
|
|
664 |
% @include file insert text of that file as input. |
% @include file insert text of that file as input. |
665 |
|
% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name). |
666 |
\def\include{\parsearg\includezzz} |
\def\include{\begingroup |
667 |
%Use \input\thisfile to avoid blank after \input, which may be an active |
\catcode`\\=12 |
668 |
%char (in which case the blank would become the \input argument). |
\catcode`~=12 |
669 |
%The grouping keeps the value of \thisfile correct even when @include |
\catcode`^=12 |
670 |
%is nested. |
\catcode`_=12 |
671 |
\def\includezzz #1{\begingroup |
\catcode`|=12 |
672 |
\def\thisfile{#1}\message{<opening \thisfile>}\input\thisfile\message{<closing \thisfile>} |
\catcode`<=12 |
673 |
|
\catcode`>=12 |
674 |
|
\catcode`+=12 |
675 |
|
\parsearg\includezzz} |
676 |
|
% Restore active chars for included file. |
677 |
|
\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup |
678 |
|
% Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work. |
679 |
|
\def\thisfile{#1}% |
680 |
|
\input\thisfile |
681 |
\endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
682 |
|
|
683 |
\def\thisfile{} |
\def\thisfile{} |
692 |
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space |
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space |
693 |
|
|
694 |
\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx} |
\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx} |
695 |
\def\spxxx #1{\par \vskip #1\baselineskip} |
\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip} |
696 |
|
|
697 |
% @comment ...line which is ignored... |
% @comment ...line which is ignored... |
698 |
% @c is the same as @comment |
% @c is the same as @comment |
699 |
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment |
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment |
700 |
|
|
701 |
\def\comment{\catcode 64=\other \catcode 123=\other \catcode 125=\other% |
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other% |
702 |
\parsearg \commentxxx} |
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other% |
703 |
|
\commentxxx} |
704 |
\def\commentxxx #1{\catcode 64=0 \catcode 123=1 \catcode 125=2 } |
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}} |
705 |
|
|
706 |
\let\c=\comment |
\let\c=\comment |
707 |
|
|
708 |
|
% @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only. |
709 |
|
\let\paragraphindent=\comment |
710 |
|
|
711 |
% Prevent errors for section commands. |
% Prevent errors for section commands. |
712 |
% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. |
% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals. |
713 |
\def\ignoresections{% |
\def\ignoresections{% |
742 |
% incorrectly. |
% incorrectly. |
743 |
% |
% |
744 |
\def\ignoremorecommands{% |
\def\ignoremorecommands{% |
745 |
|
\let\defcodeindex = \relax |
746 |
\let\defcv = \relax |
\let\defcv = \relax |
747 |
\let\deffn = \relax |
\let\deffn = \relax |
748 |
\let\deffnx = \relax |
\let\deffnx = \relax |
766 |
\let\printindex = \relax |
\let\printindex = \relax |
767 |
\let\pxref = \relax |
\let\pxref = \relax |
768 |
\let\settitle = \relax |
\let\settitle = \relax |
769 |
|
\let\setchapternewpage = \relax |
770 |
|
\let\setchapterstyle = \relax |
771 |
|
\let\everyheading = \relax |
772 |
|
\let\evenheading = \relax |
773 |
|
\let\oddheading = \relax |
774 |
|
\let\everyfooting = \relax |
775 |
|
\let\evenfooting = \relax |
776 |
|
\let\oddfooting = \relax |
777 |
|
\let\headings = \relax |
778 |
\let\include = \relax |
\let\include = \relax |
779 |
\let\lowersections = \relax |
\let\lowersections = \relax |
780 |
\let\down = \relax |
\let\down = \relax |
783 |
\let\set = \relax |
\let\set = \relax |
784 |
\let\clear = \relax |
\let\clear = \relax |
785 |
\let\item = \relax |
\let\item = \relax |
|
\let\message = \relax |
|
786 |
} |
} |
787 |
|
|
788 |
% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. |
% Ignore @ignore ... @end ignore. |
789 |
% |
% |
790 |
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} |
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}} |
791 |
|
|
792 |
% Also ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. |
% Ignore @ifinfo, @ifhtml, @ifnottex, @html, @menu, and @direntry text. |
793 |
% |
% |
794 |
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}} |
795 |
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}} |
796 |
|
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}} |
797 |
\def\html{\doignore{html}} |
\def\html{\doignore{html}} |
798 |
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}} |
799 |
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} |
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}} |
800 |
|
|
801 |
|
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file |
802 |
|
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX. |
803 |
|
\let\dircategory = \comment |
804 |
|
|
805 |
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. |
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'. |
806 |
% |
% |
807 |
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup |
809 |
\ignoresections |
\ignoresections |
810 |
% |
% |
811 |
% Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. |
% Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'. |
812 |
\long\def\doignoretext##1\end #1{\enddoignore}% |
% This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in |
813 |
|
% this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match. |
814 |
|
\long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}% |
815 |
% |
% |
816 |
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. |
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants. |
817 |
\catcode32 = 10 |
\catcode32 = 10 |
818 |
% |
% |
819 |
|
% Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble. |
820 |
|
\catcode`\{ = 9 |
821 |
|
\catcode`\} = 9 |
822 |
|
% |
823 |
|
% We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence. |
824 |
|
\catcode`\@ = 12 |
825 |
|
% |
826 |
|
% Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line |
827 |
|
% will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example) |
828 |
|
% @c @end ifinfo |
829 |
|
% and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored. |
830 |
|
% (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.) |
831 |
|
\catcode`\c = 14 |
832 |
|
% |
833 |
% And now expand that command. |
% And now expand that command. |
834 |
\doignoretext |
\doignoretext |
835 |
} |
} |
849 |
\immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} |
\immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.} |
850 |
\immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} |
\immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.} |
851 |
\immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} |
\immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.} |
852 |
|
\immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)} |
853 |
\immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} |
\immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the} |
854 |
\immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} |
\immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution} |
855 |
\immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.} |
\immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.} |
856 |
\immediate\write16{} |
\immediate\write16{} |
857 |
\warnedobstrue |
\global\warnedobstrue |
858 |
\fi |
\fi |
859 |
} |
} |
860 |
|
|
921 |
\pretolerance = 10000 |
\pretolerance = 10000 |
922 |
% |
% |
923 |
% Do not execute instructions in @tex |
% Do not execute instructions in @tex |
924 |
\def\tex{\doignore{tex}} |
\def\tex{\doignore{tex}}% |
925 |
|
% Do not execute macro definitions. |
926 |
|
% `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off. |
927 |
|
\def\macro{\doignore{ma}}% |
928 |
} |
} |
929 |
|
|
930 |
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. |
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value. |
933 |
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be |
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be |
934 |
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our |
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our |
935 |
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we |
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we |
936 |
% didn't need it. |
% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid |
937 |
|
% losing inside @example, for instance. |
938 |
% |
% |
939 |
\def\set{\parsearg\setxxx} |
\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10 |
940 |
|
\catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR. |
941 |
|
\parsearg\setxxx} |
942 |
\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} |
\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy} |
943 |
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{% |
944 |
\def\temp{#2}% |
\def\temp{#2}% |
945 |
\ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty |
\ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty |
946 |
\else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. |
\else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted. |
947 |
\fi |
\fi |
948 |
|
\endgroup |
949 |
} |
} |
950 |
\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\xdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} |
% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or |
951 |
|
% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into |
952 |
|
% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'. |
953 |
|
\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}} |
954 |
|
|
955 |
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. |
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR. |
956 |
% |
% |
959 |
|
|
960 |
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. |
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo. |
961 |
% |
% |
962 |
\def\value#1{\expandafter |
{ |
963 |
\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
\catcode`\_ = \active |
964 |
{\{No value for ``#1''\}} |
% |
965 |
\else \csname SET#1\endcsname \fi} |
% We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if |
966 |
|
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any |
967 |
|
% such active characters to their normal equivalents. |
968 |
|
\gdef\value{\begingroup |
969 |
|
\catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 |
970 |
|
\indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore |
971 |
|
\valuexxx} |
972 |
|
} |
973 |
|
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup} |
974 |
|
|
975 |
|
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's |
976 |
|
% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones |
977 |
|
% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything |
978 |
|
% about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result |
979 |
|
% winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value |
980 |
|
% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail |
981 |
|
% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a |
982 |
|
% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete). |
983 |
|
% |
984 |
|
\def\expandablevalue#1{% |
985 |
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax |
986 |
|
{[No value for ``#1'']}% |
987 |
|
\else |
988 |
|
\csname SET#1\endcsname |
989 |
|
\fi |
990 |
|
} |
991 |
|
|
992 |
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined |
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined |
993 |
% with @set. |
% with @set. |
1019 |
\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} |
\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}} |
1020 |
\defineunmatchedend{ifclear} |
\defineunmatchedend{ifclear} |
1021 |
|
|
1022 |
% @iftex always succeeds; we read the text following, through @end |
% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo always succeed; we read the text |
1023 |
% iftex). But `@end iftex' should be valid only after an @iftex. |
% following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make `@end iftex' |
1024 |
|
% (etc.) valid only after an @iftex. |
1025 |
% |
% |
1026 |
\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} |
\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}} |
1027 |
|
\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}} |
1028 |
|
\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}} |
1029 |
\defineunmatchedend{iftex} |
\defineunmatchedend{iftex} |
1030 |
|
\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml} |
1031 |
|
\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo} |
1032 |
|
|
1033 |
% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it |
% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (for example) and end it |
1034 |
% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no |
% at @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no |
1074 |
\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} |
\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath} |
1075 |
\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} |
\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath} |
1076 |
|
|
1077 |
\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} |
% @refill is a no-op. |
|
\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} |
|
|
\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} |
|
|
\let\nwnode=\node |
|
|
\let\lastnode=\relax |
|
|
|
|
|
\def\donoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}\fi |
|
|
\global\let\lastnode=\relax} |
|
|
|
|
|
\def\unnumbnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\unnumbsetref{\lastnode}\fi |
|
|
\global\let\lastnode=\relax} |
|
|
|
|
|
\def\appendixnoderef{\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\appendixsetref{\lastnode}\fi |
|
|
\global\let\lastnode=\relax} |
|
|
|
|
1078 |
\let\refill=\relax |
\let\refill=\relax |
1079 |
|
|
1080 |
|
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to |
1081 |
|
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs. |
1082 |
|
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename). |
1083 |
|
% |
1084 |
|
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files. |
1085 |
|
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse |
1086 |
|
|
1087 |
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. |
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file. |
1088 |
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. |
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input. |
1089 |
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. |
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo. |
1090 |
\def\setfilename{% |
\def\setfilename{% |
1091 |
\readauxfile |
\iflinks |
1092 |
\opencontents |
\readauxfile |
1093 |
|
\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case. |
1094 |
\openindices |
\openindices |
1095 |
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'. |
1096 |
\global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
\global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds. |
1097 |
|
% |
1098 |
|
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it. |
1099 |
|
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc. |
1100 |
|
% Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input. |
1101 |
|
\openin 1 texinfo.cnf |
1102 |
|
\ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi |
1103 |
|
\closein1 |
1104 |
|
\temp |
1105 |
|
% |
1106 |
\comment % Ignore the actual filename. |
\comment % Ignore the actual filename. |
1107 |
} |
} |
1108 |
|
|
1109 |
|
% Called from \setfilename. |
1110 |
|
% |
1111 |
|
\def\openindices{% |
1112 |
|
\newindex{cp}% |
1113 |
|
\newcodeindex{fn}% |
1114 |
|
\newcodeindex{vr}% |
1115 |
|
\newcodeindex{tp}% |
1116 |
|
\newcodeindex{ky}% |
1117 |
|
\newcodeindex{pg}% |
1118 |
|
} |
1119 |
|
|
1120 |
|
% @bye. |
1121 |
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} |
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend} |
1122 |
|
|
|
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} |
|
|
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, |
|
|
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} |
|
1123 |
|
|
1124 |
\message{fonts,} |
\message{fonts,} |
|
|
|
1125 |
% Font-change commands. |
% Font-change commands. |
1126 |
|
|
1127 |
% Texinfo supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. |
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not. |
1128 |
% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. |
% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc. |
1129 |
\newfam\sffam |
\newfam\sffam |
1130 |
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} |
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf} |
1131 |
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. |
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf. |
1132 |
|
|
1133 |
%% Try out Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf |
% We don't need math for this one. |
1134 |
\let\mainmagstep=\magstephalf |
\def\ttsl{\tenttsl} |
1135 |
|
|
1136 |
|
% Use Computer Modern fonts at \magstephalf (11pt). |
1137 |
|
\newcount\mainmagstep |
1138 |
|
\mainmagstep=\magstephalf |
1139 |
|
|
1140 |
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the |
1141 |
% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). |
% specified font prefix (normally `cm'). |
1142 |
\def\setfont#1#2{\font#1=\fontprefix#2} |
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor |
1143 |
|
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4} |
1144 |
|
|
1145 |
% Use cm as the default font prefix. |
% Use cm as the default font prefix. |
1146 |
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix |
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix |
1148 |
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined |
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined |
1149 |
\def\fontprefix{cm} |
\def\fontprefix{cm} |
1150 |
\fi |
\fi |
1151 |
|
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM. |
1152 |
|
\def\rmshape{r} |
1153 |
|
\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold |
1154 |
|
\def\bfshape{b} |
1155 |
|
\def\bxshape{bx} |
1156 |
|
\def\ttshape{tt} |
1157 |
|
\def\ttbshape{tt} |
1158 |
|
\def\ttslshape{sltt} |
1159 |
|
\def\itshape{ti} |
1160 |
|
\def\itbshape{bxti} |
1161 |
|
\def\slshape{sl} |
1162 |
|
\def\slbshape{bxsl} |
1163 |
|
\def\sfshape{ss} |
1164 |
|
\def\sfbshape{ss} |
1165 |
|
\def\scshape{csc} |
1166 |
|
\def\scbshape{csc} |
1167 |
|
|
1168 |
\ifx\bigger\relax |
\ifx\bigger\relax |
1169 |
\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1 |
\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1 |
1170 |
\setfont\textrm{r12} |
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000} |
1171 |
\setfont\texttt{tt12} |
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000} |
1172 |
\else |
\else |
1173 |
\setfont\textrm{r10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1174 |
\setfont\texttt{tt10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1175 |
\fi |
\fi |
1176 |
% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10. |
% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10. |
1177 |
% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10 |
% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10 |
1178 |
% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10. |
% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10. |
1179 |
\setfont\textbf{b10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1180 |
\setfont\textit{ti10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1181 |
\setfont\textsl{sl10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1182 |
\setfont\textsf{ss10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1183 |
\setfont\textsc{csc10 scaled \mainmagstep} |
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1184 |
|
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep} |
1185 |
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep |
1186 |
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep |
1187 |
|
|
1188 |
% A few fonts for @defun, etc. |
% A few fonts for @defun, etc. |
1189 |
\setfont\defbf{bx10 scaled \magstep1} %was 1314 |
\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314 |
1190 |
\setfont\deftt{tt10 scaled \magstep1} |
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} |
1191 |
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} |
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf} |
1192 |
|
|
1193 |
% Fonts for indices and small examples. |
% Fonts for indices and small examples (9pt). |
1194 |
% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic, |
% We actually use the slanted font rather than the italic, |
1195 |
% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that. |
% because texinfo normally uses the slanted fonts for that. |
1196 |
% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they |
% Do not make many font distinctions in general in the index, since they |
1197 |
% aren't very useful. |
% aren't very useful. |
1198 |
\setfont\ninett{tt9} |
\setfont\ninett\ttshape{9}{1000} |
1199 |
\setfont\indrm{r9} |
\setfont\ninettsl\ttslshape{10}{900} |
1200 |
\setfont\indit{sl9} |
\setfont\indrm\rmshape{9}{1000} |
1201 |
\let\indsl=\indit |
\setfont\indit\itshape{9}{1000} |
1202 |
|
\setfont\indsl\slshape{9}{1000} |
1203 |
\let\indtt=\ninett |
\let\indtt=\ninett |
1204 |
|
\let\indttsl=\ninettsl |
1205 |
\let\indsf=\indrm |
\let\indsf=\indrm |
1206 |
\let\indbf=\indrm |
\let\indbf=\indrm |
1207 |
\let\indsc=\indrm |
\setfont\indsc\scshape{10}{900} |
1208 |
\font\indi=cmmi9 |
\font\indi=cmmi9 |
1209 |
\font\indsy=cmsy9 |
\font\indsy=cmsy9 |
1210 |
|
|
1211 |
% Fonts for headings |
% Fonts for title page: |
1212 |
\setfont\chaprm{bx12 scaled \magstep2} |
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
1213 |
\setfont\chapit{ti12 scaled \magstep2} |
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
1214 |
\setfont\chapsl{sl12 scaled \magstep2} |
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
1215 |
\setfont\chaptt{tt12 scaled \magstep2} |
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3} |
1216 |
\setfont\chapsf{ss12 scaled \magstep2} |
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4} |
1217 |
|
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1} |
1218 |
|
\let\titlebf=\titlerm |
1219 |
|
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4} |
1220 |
|
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3 |
1221 |
|
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4 |
1222 |
|
\def\authorrm{\secrm} |
1223 |
|
|
1224 |
|
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt). |
1225 |
|
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
1226 |
|
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3} |
1227 |
|
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3} |
1228 |
|
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2} |
1229 |
|
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3} |
1230 |
|
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000} |
1231 |
\let\chapbf=\chaprm |
\let\chapbf=\chaprm |
1232 |
\setfont\chapsc{csc10 scaled\magstep3} |
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3} |
1233 |
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 |
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2 |
1234 |
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 |
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3 |
1235 |
|
|
1236 |
\setfont\secrm{bx12 scaled \magstep1} |
% Section fonts (14.4pt). |
1237 |
\setfont\secit{ti12 scaled \magstep1} |
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
1238 |
\setfont\secsl{sl12 scaled \magstep1} |
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2} |
1239 |
\setfont\sectt{tt12 scaled \magstep1} |
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2} |
1240 |
\setfont\secsf{ss12 scaled \magstep1} |
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
1241 |
\setfont\secbf{bx12 scaled \magstep1} |
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2} |
1242 |
\setfont\secsc{csc10 scaled\magstep2} |
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1} |
1243 |
|
\let\secbf\secrm |
1244 |
|
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2} |
1245 |
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1 |
1246 |
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2 |
1247 |
|
|
1248 |
% \setfont\ssecrm{bx10 scaled \magstep1} % This size an font looked bad. |
% \setfont\ssecrm\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} % This size an font looked bad. |
1249 |
% \setfont\ssecit{cmti10 scaled \magstep1} % The letters were too crowded. |
% \setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{\magstep1} % The letters were too crowded. |
1250 |
% \setfont\ssecsl{sl10 scaled \magstep1} |
% \setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1} |
1251 |
% \setfont\ssectt{tt10 scaled \magstep1} |
% \setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1} |
1252 |
% \setfont\ssecsf{ss10 scaled \magstep1} |
% \setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{\magstep1} |
1253 |
|
|
1254 |
%\setfont\ssecrm{b10 scaled 1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx. |
%\setfont\ssecrm\bfshape{10}{1315} % Note the use of cmb rather than cmbx. |
1255 |
%\setfont\ssecit{ti10 scaled 1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than |
%\setfont\ssecit\itshape{10}{1315} % Also, the size is a little larger than |
1256 |
%\setfont\ssecsl{sl10 scaled 1315} % being scaled magstep1. |
%\setfont\ssecsl\slshape{10}{1315} % being scaled magstep1. |
1257 |
%\setfont\ssectt{tt10 scaled 1315} |
%\setfont\ssectt\ttshape{10}{1315} |
1258 |
%\setfont\ssecsf{ss10 scaled 1315} |
%\setfont\ssecsf\sfshape{10}{1315} |
1259 |
|
|
1260 |
%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm |
%\let\ssecbf=\ssecrm |
1261 |
|
|
1262 |
\setfont\ssecrm{bx12 scaled \magstephalf} |
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt). |
1263 |
\setfont\ssecit{ti12 scaled \magstephalf} |
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
1264 |
\setfont\ssecsl{sl12 scaled \magstephalf} |
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315} |
1265 |
\setfont\ssectt{tt12 scaled \magstephalf} |
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315} |
1266 |
\setfont\ssecsf{ss12 scaled \magstephalf} |
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
1267 |
\setfont\ssecbf{bx12 scaled \magstephalf} |
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315} |
1268 |
\setfont\ssecsc{csc10 scaled \magstep1} |
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf} |
1269 |
|
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm |
1270 |
|
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1} |
1271 |
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf |
1272 |
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1 |
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315 |
1273 |
% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, |
% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5, |
1274 |
% but that is not a standard magnification. |
% but that is not a standard magnification. |
1275 |
|
|
|
% Fonts for title page: |
|
|
\setfont\titlerm{bx12 scaled \magstep3} |
|
|
\let\authorrm = \secrm |
|
|
|
|
1276 |
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters, |
1277 |
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since |
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since |
1278 |
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we |
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts, we |
1289 |
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead |
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead |
1290 |
% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work |
% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work |
1291 |
% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most |
% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most |
1292 |
% cases, not the current. Plain TeX does, for example, |
% cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam |
1293 |
% \def\bf{\fam=\bffam \tenbf} By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need |
% \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to |
1294 |
% to redefine \bf itself. |
% redefine \bf itself. |
1295 |
\def\textfonts{% |
\def\textfonts{% |
1296 |
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl |
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl |
1297 |
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc |
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc |
1298 |
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy |
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl |
1299 |
\resetmathfonts} |
\resetmathfonts} |
1300 |
|
\def\titlefonts{% |
1301 |
|
\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl |
1302 |
|
\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc |
1303 |
|
\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy |
1304 |
|
\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl |
1305 |
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}} |
1306 |
|
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}} |
1307 |
\def\chapfonts{% |
\def\chapfonts{% |
1308 |
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl |
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl |
1309 |
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc |
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc |
1310 |
\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy |
\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl |
1311 |
\resetmathfonts} |
\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}} |
1312 |
\def\secfonts{% |
\def\secfonts{% |
1313 |
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl |
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl |
1314 |
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc |
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc |
1315 |
\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy |
\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl |
1316 |
\resetmathfonts} |
\resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}} |
1317 |
\def\subsecfonts{% |
\def\subsecfonts{% |
1318 |
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl |
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl |
1319 |
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc |
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc |
1320 |
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy |
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl |
1321 |
\resetmathfonts} |
\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}} |
1322 |
|
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf? |
1323 |
\def\indexfonts{% |
\def\indexfonts{% |
1324 |
\let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl |
\let\tenrm=\indrm \let\tenit=\indit \let\tensl=\indsl |
1325 |
\let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc |
\let\tenbf=\indbf \let\tentt=\indtt \let\smallcaps=\indsc |
1326 |
\let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy |
\let\tensf=\indsf \let\teni=\indi \let\tensy=\indsy \let\tenttsl=\indttsl |
1327 |
\resetmathfonts} |
\resetmathfonts \setleading{12pt}} |
1328 |
|
|
1329 |
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. |
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes. |
1330 |
% |
% |
1331 |
\textfonts |
\textfonts |
1332 |
|
|
1333 |
|
% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts. |
1334 |
|
\def\angleleft{$\langle$} |
1335 |
|
\def\angleright{$\rangle$} |
1336 |
|
|
1337 |
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks |
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks |
1338 |
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 |
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0 |
1339 |
|
|
1340 |
% Fonts for short table of contents. |
% Fonts for short table of contents. |
1341 |
\setfont\shortcontrm{r12} |
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000} |
1342 |
\setfont\shortcontbf{bx12} |
\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000} |
1343 |
\setfont\shortcontsl{sl12} |
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000} |
1344 |
|
|
1345 |
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans |
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans |
1346 |
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic |
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic |
1348 |
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction |
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction |
1349 |
% unless the following character is such as not to need one. |
% unless the following character is such as not to need one. |
1350 |
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} |
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi} |
1351 |
\def\smartitalic#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
1352 |
|
\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx} |
1353 |
|
|
1354 |
\let\i=\smartitalic |
\let\i=\smartitalic |
1355 |
\let\var=\smartitalic |
\let\var=\smartslanted |
1356 |
\let\dfn=\smartitalic |
\let\dfn=\smartslanted |
1357 |
\let\emph=\smartitalic |
\let\emph=\smartitalic |
1358 |
\let\cite=\smartitalic |
\let\cite=\smartslanted |
1359 |
|
|
1360 |
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}} |
1361 |
\let\strong=\b |
\let\strong=\b |
1368 |
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } |
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- } |
1369 |
|
|
1370 |
\def\t#1{% |
\def\t#1{% |
1371 |
{\tt \nohyphenation \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% |
{\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}% |
1372 |
\null |
\null |
1373 |
} |
} |
1374 |
\let\ttfont = \t |
\let\ttfont=\t |
1375 |
%\def\samp #1{`{\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}'\null} |
\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} |
1376 |
\def\samp #1{`\tclose{#1}'\null} |
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{8}{1000} |
1377 |
\def\key #1{{\tt \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} |
\font\smallsy=cmsy9 |
1378 |
|
\def\key#1{{\smallrm\textfont2=\smallsy \leavevmode\hbox{% |
1379 |
|
\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{% |
1380 |
|
\vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt |
1381 |
|
\hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}% |
1382 |
|
\kern-0.4pt\hrule}% |
1383 |
|
\kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}} |
1384 |
|
% The old definition, with no lozenge: |
1385 |
|
%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null} |
1386 |
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} |
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1} |
1387 |
|
|
1388 |
|
% @file, @option are the same as @samp. |
1389 |
\let\file=\samp |
\let\file=\samp |
1390 |
|
\let\option=\samp |
1391 |
|
|
1392 |
% @code is a modification of @t, |
% @code is a modification of @t, |
1393 |
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. |
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text. |
1413 |
} |
} |
1414 |
|
|
1415 |
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code. |
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code. |
1416 |
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overful hboxes |
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes |
1417 |
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. |
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc. |
1418 |
|
|
1419 |
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control |
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control |
1420 |
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. |
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words. |
1421 |
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) |
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that) |
1422 |
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate an a dash. |
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. |
1423 |
% -- rms. |
% -- rms. |
1424 |
{ |
{ |
1425 |
\catcode`\-=\active |
\catcode`\-=\active |
1426 |
\catcode`\_=\active |
\catcode`\_=\active |
1427 |
\global\def\code{\begingroup \catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder \codex} |
% |
1428 |
% The following is used by \doprintindex to insure that long function names |
\global\def\code{\begingroup |
1429 |
% wrap around. It is necessary for - and _ to be active before the index is |
\catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash |
1430 |
% read from the file, as \entry parses the arguments long before \code is |
\catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder |
1431 |
% ever called. -- mycroft |
\codex |
1432 |
\global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash \catcode`\_=\active \let_\realunder} |
} |
1433 |
|
% |
1434 |
|
% If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index, |
1435 |
|
% just treat them as a normal -. |
1436 |
|
\global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash} |
1437 |
} |
} |
1438 |
|
|
1439 |
\def\realdash{-} |
\def\realdash{-} |
|
\def\realunder{_} |
|
1440 |
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} |
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}} |
1441 |
\def\codeunder{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}} |
\def\codeunder{\ifusingtt{\normalunderscore\discretionary{}{}{}}{\_}} |
1442 |
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup} |
1443 |
|
|
1444 |
%\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary |
%\let\exp=\tclose %Was temporary |
1446 |
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command, |
1447 |
% then @kbd has no effect. |
% then @kbd has no effect. |
1448 |
|
|
1449 |
|
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always), |
1450 |
|
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends), |
1451 |
|
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always). |
1452 |
|
\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx} |
1453 |
|
\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{% |
1454 |
|
\def\arg{#1}% |
1455 |
|
\ifx\arg\worddistinct |
1456 |
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}% |
1457 |
|
\else\ifx\arg\wordexample |
1458 |
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
1459 |
|
\else\ifx\arg\wordcode |
1460 |
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}% |
1461 |
|
\fi\fi\fi |
1462 |
|
} |
1463 |
|
\def\worddistinct{distinct} |
1464 |
|
\def\wordexample{example} |
1465 |
|
\def\wordcode{code} |
1466 |
|
|
1467 |
|
% Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro, |
1468 |
|
% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.) |
1469 |
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl} |
1470 |
|
|
1471 |
\def\xkey{\key} |
\def\xkey{\key} |
1472 |
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% |
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}% |
1473 |
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% |
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}% |
1474 |
\else\tclose{\look}\fi |
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi |
1475 |
\else\tclose{\look}\fi} |
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi} |
1476 |
|
|
1477 |
|
% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code. |
1478 |
|
\let\url=\code |
1479 |
|
\let\env=\code |
1480 |
|
\let\command=\code |
1481 |
|
|
1482 |
|
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional second argument |
1483 |
|
% specifying the text to display. First (mandatory) arg is the url. |
1484 |
|
% Perhaps eventually put in a hypertex \special here. |
1485 |
|
% |
1486 |
|
\def\uref#1{\urefxxx #1,,\finish} |
1487 |
|
\def\urefxxx#1,#2,#3\finish{% |
1488 |
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% |
1489 |
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt |
1490 |
|
\unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% |
1491 |
|
\else |
1492 |
|
\code{#1}% |
1493 |
|
\fi |
1494 |
|
} |
1495 |
|
|
1496 |
|
% rms does not like the angle brackets --karl, 17may97. |
1497 |
|
% So now @email is just like @uref. |
1498 |
|
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright} |
1499 |
|
\let\email=\uref |
1500 |
|
|
1501 |
|
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the |
1502 |
|
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and |
1503 |
|
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have |
1504 |
|
% this property, we can check that font parameter. |
1505 |
|
% |
1506 |
|
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt } |
1507 |
|
|
1508 |
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the |
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the |
1509 |
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of |
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt. |
|
% @dmn{}pt. |
|
1510 |
% |
% |
1511 |
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} |
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1} |
1512 |
|
|
1513 |
\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} |
\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par} |
1514 |
|
|
1515 |
\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} % |
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'', |
1516 |
|
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for |
1517 |
|
% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96. |
1518 |
|
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null} |
1519 |
|
|
1520 |
|
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii. |
1521 |
|
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font |
1522 |
|
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font |
1523 |
|
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font |
1524 |
|
|
1525 |
|
% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps. |
1526 |
|
\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}} |
1527 |
|
|
1528 |
|
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign. |
1529 |
|
\def\pounds{{\it\$}} |
1530 |
|
|
|
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font |
|
|
% Use of \lowercase was suggested. |
|
|
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font |
|
|
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font |
|
1531 |
|
|
1532 |
\message{page headings,} |
\message{page headings,} |
1533 |
|
|
1535 |
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc |
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc |
1536 |
|
|
1537 |
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. |
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage. |
|
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlerm #1}} |
|
|
|
|
1538 |
\newif\ifseenauthor |
\newif\ifseenauthor |
1539 |
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage |
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage |
1540 |
|
|
1541 |
|
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the |
1542 |
|
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage. |
1543 |
|
% |
1544 |
|
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage |
1545 |
|
\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue |
1546 |
|
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage |
1547 |
|
\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue |
1548 |
|
|
1549 |
\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} |
\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz} |
1550 |
\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}% |
1551 |
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page} |
1552 |
|
|
1553 |
\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts |
\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts |
1554 |
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm |
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm |
|
% I deinstalled the following change because \cmr12 is undefined. |
|
|
% This change was not in the ChangeLog anyway. --rms. |
|
|
% \let\subtitlerm=\cmr12 |
|
1555 |
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% |
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}% |
1556 |
% |
% |
1557 |
\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% |
\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}% |
1561 |
% |
% |
1562 |
% Now you can print the title using @title. |
% Now you can print the title using @title. |
1563 |
\def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% |
\def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}% |
1564 |
\def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefont{##1}} |
\def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1} |
1565 |
% print a rule at the page bottom also. |
% print a rule at the page bottom also. |
1566 |
\finishedtitlepagefalse |
\finishedtitlepagefalse |
1567 |
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% |
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}% |
1568 |
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. |
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title. |
1569 |
\finishedtitlepagetrue |
\finishedtitlepagetrue |
1570 |
% |
% |
1582 |
\let\oldpage = \page |
\let\oldpage = \page |
1583 |
\def\page{% |
\def\page{% |
1584 |
\iffinishedtitlepage\else |
\iffinishedtitlepage\else |
1585 |
\finishtitlepage |
\finishtitlepage |
1586 |
\fi |
\fi |
1587 |
\oldpage |
\oldpage |
1588 |
\let\page = \oldpage |
\let\page = \oldpage |
1600 |
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want. |
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want. |
1601 |
\oldpage |
\oldpage |
1602 |
\endgroup |
\endgroup |
1603 |
|
% |
1604 |
|
% If they want short, they certainly want long too. |
1605 |
|
\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage |
1606 |
|
\shortcontents |
1607 |
|
\contents |
1608 |
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax |
1609 |
|
\global\let\contents = \relax |
1610 |
|
\fi |
1611 |
|
% |
1612 |
|
\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage |
1613 |
|
\contents |
1614 |
|
\global\let\contents = \relax |
1615 |
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax |
1616 |
|
\fi |
1617 |
|
% |
1618 |
\HEADINGSon |
\HEADINGSon |
1619 |
} |
} |
1620 |
|
|
1628 |
|
|
1629 |
\let\thispage=\folio |
\let\thispage=\folio |
1630 |
|
|
1631 |
\newtoks \evenheadline % Token sequence for heading line of even pages |
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages |
1632 |
\newtoks \oddheadline % Token sequence for heading line of odd pages |
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages |
1633 |
\newtoks \evenfootline % Token sequence for footing line of even pages |
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages |
1634 |
\newtoks \oddfootline % Token sequence for footing line of odd pages |
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages |
1635 |
|
|
1636 |
% Now make Tex use those variables |
% Now make Tex use those variables |
1637 |
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline |
1665 |
\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
1666 |
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
1667 |
|
|
1668 |
\gdef\everyheadingxxx #1{\everyheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}% |
|
\gdef\everyheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
|
1669 |
|
|
1670 |
\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
1671 |
\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
1673 |
|
|
1674 |
\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
1675 |
\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
1676 |
\global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}% |
1677 |
|
% |
1678 |
|
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume |
1679 |
|
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself. |
1680 |
|
\global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip |
1681 |
|
\global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip |
1682 |
|
} |
1683 |
|
|
1684 |
\gdef\everyfootingxxx #1{\everyfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish} |
\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}} |
|
\gdef\everyfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{% |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}} |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}} |
|
1685 |
% |
% |
1686 |
}% unbind the catcode of @. |
}% unbind the catcode of @. |
1687 |
|
|
1688 |
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. |
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing. |
1689 |
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. |
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing. |
1690 |
% @headings off turns them off. |
% @headings off turns them off. |
1691 |
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. |
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility. |
1692 |
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
1693 |
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page. |
1694 |
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. |
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page. |
1695 |
% By default, they are off. |
% By default, they are off at the start of a document, |
1696 |
|
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage. |
1697 |
|
|
1698 |
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} |
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname} |
1699 |
|
|
1707 |
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top |
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top |
1708 |
% edge of all pages. |
% edge of all pages. |
1709 |
\def\HEADINGSdouble{ |
\def\HEADINGSdouble{ |
|
%\pagealignmacro |
|
1710 |
\global\pageno=1 |
\global\pageno=1 |
1711 |
\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
1712 |
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
1713 |
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
1714 |
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
1715 |
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
1716 |
} |
} |
1717 |
|
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
1718 |
|
|
1719 |
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, |
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page, |
1720 |
% page number on top right. |
% page number on top right. |
1721 |
\def\HEADINGSsingle{ |
\def\HEADINGSsingle{ |
|
%\pagealignmacro |
|
1722 |
\global\pageno=1 |
\global\pageno=1 |
1723 |
\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
\global\evenfootline={\hfil} |
1724 |
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
1725 |
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
1726 |
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
1727 |
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
1728 |
} |
} |
1729 |
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} |
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble} |
1730 |
|
|
1735 |
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
1736 |
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}} |
1737 |
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
1738 |
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
1739 |
} |
} |
1740 |
|
|
1741 |
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} |
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex} |
1744 |
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
\global\oddfootline={\hfil} |
1745 |
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
1746 |
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}} |
1747 |
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
1748 |
} |
} |
1749 |
|
|
1750 |
% Subroutines used in generating headings |
% Subroutines used in generating headings |
1768 |
\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} |
\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz} |
1769 |
\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} |
\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}} |
1770 |
|
|
|
\message{tables,} |
|
|
|
|
|
% @tabs -- simple alignment |
|
|
|
|
|
% These don't work. For one thing, \+ is defined as outer. |
|
|
% So these macros cannot even be defined. |
|
|
|
|
|
%\def\tabs{\parsearg\tabszzz} |
|
|
%\def\tabszzz #1{\settabs\+#1\cr} |
|
|
%\def\tabline{\parsearg\tablinezzz} |
|
|
%\def\tablinezzz #1{\+#1\cr} |
|
|
%\def\&{&} |
|
1771 |
|
|
1772 |
|
\message{tables,} |
1773 |
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). |
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x). |
1774 |
|
|
1775 |
% default indentation of table text |
% default indentation of table text |
1789 |
|
|
1790 |
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip |
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip |
1791 |
|
|
1792 |
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} |
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi} |
1793 |
|
|
1794 |
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} |
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz} |
1795 |
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} |
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz} |
1813 |
\itemindex{#1}% |
\itemindex{#1}% |
1814 |
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. |
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx. |
1815 |
% |
% |
|
% Be sure we are not still in the middle of a paragraph. |
|
|
%{\parskip = 0in |
|
|
%\par |
|
|
%}% |
|
|
% |
|
1816 |
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line |
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line |
1817 |
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that |
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that |
1818 |
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next |
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next |
1841 |
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse |
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse |
1842 |
\else |
\else |
1843 |
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the |
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the |
1844 |
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line. Since that |
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line. |
|
% text will be indented by \tableindent, we make the item text be in |
|
|
% a zero-width box. |
|
1845 |
\noindent |
\noindent |
1846 |
\rlap{\hskip -\tableindent\box0}\ignorespaces% |
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in |
1847 |
\endgroup% |
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and |
1848 |
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue% |
% eventually be printed. |
1849 |
|
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent |
1850 |
|
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 |
1851 |
|
\unhbox0 |
1852 |
|
\nobreak\kern\dimen0 |
1853 |
|
\endgroup |
1854 |
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue |
1855 |
\fi |
\fi |
1856 |
} |
} |
1857 |
|
|
1862 |
\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} |
\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}} |
1863 |
\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} |
\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}} |
1864 |
|
|
1865 |
%% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work |
% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work. |
1866 |
\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} |
\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}} |
1867 |
|
|
1868 |
|
% @table, @ftable, @vtable. |
1869 |
\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} |
\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex} |
1870 |
{\obeylines\obeyspaces% |
{\obeylines\obeyspaces% |
1871 |
\gdef\tablex #1^^M{% |
\gdef\tablex #1^^M{% |
1896 |
\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{% |
\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{% |
1897 |
\aboveenvbreak % |
\aboveenvbreak % |
1898 |
\begingroup % |
\begingroup % |
1899 |
\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Neccessary kludge. |
\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge. |
1900 |
\let\itemindex=#1% |
\let\itemindex=#1% |
1901 |
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi % |
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi % |
1902 |
\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi % |
\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi % |
1925 |
\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} |
\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz} |
1926 |
|
|
1927 |
\def\itemizezzz #1{% |
\def\itemizezzz #1{% |
1928 |
\begingroup % ended by the @end itemsize |
\begingroup % ended by the @end itemize |
1929 |
\itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} |
\itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize} |
1930 |
} |
} |
1931 |
|
|
2053 |
\def\itemizeitem{% |
\def\itemizeitem{% |
2054 |
\advance\itemno by 1 |
\advance\itemno by 1 |
2055 |
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% |
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% |
2056 |
\ifhmode \errmessage{\in hmode at itemizeitem}\fi |
\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi |
2057 |
{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt |
{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt |
2058 |
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% |
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}% |
2059 |
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% |
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% |
2060 |
\flushcr} |
\flushcr} |
2061 |
|
|
2062 |
% @multitable macros |
% @multitable macros |
2063 |
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94 |
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96 |
2064 |
% |
% |
2065 |
% @multitable ... @endmultitable will make as many columns as desired. |
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired. |
2066 |
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width |
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width |
2067 |
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, |
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line, |
2068 |
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. |
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page. |
2069 |
|
|
2071 |
|
|
2072 |
% To make preamble: |
% To make preamble: |
2073 |
% |
% |
2074 |
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: |
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize: |
2075 |
% @multitable @percentofhsize .2 .3 .5 |
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45 |
2076 |
% @item ... |
% @item ... |
2077 |
% |
% |
2078 |
% Numbers following @percentofhsize are the percent of the total |
% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total |
2079 |
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many |
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many |
2080 |
% columns as desired. |
% columns as desired. |
2081 |
|
|
2082 |
|
|
2083 |
% Or use a template: |
% Or use a template: |
2084 |
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
2085 |
% @item ... |
% @item ... |
2086 |
% using the widest term desired in each column. |
% using the widest term desired in each column. |
2087 |
|
% |
2088 |
|
% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in |
2089 |
|
% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it |
2090 |
|
% will parse correctly, i.e., |
2091 |
|
% |
2092 |
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 |
2093 |
|
% template} |
2094 |
|
% Not: |
2095 |
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} |
2096 |
|
% {Column 3 template} |
2097 |
|
|
2098 |
|
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column |
|
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column |
|
2099 |
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's |
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's |
2100 |
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, |
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed, |
2101 |
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. |
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns. |
2102 |
|
|
2103 |
% @item, @tab, @multicolumn or @endmulticolumn do not need to be on their |
% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their |
2104 |
% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. |
% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are. |
2105 |
|
|
2106 |
% Sample multitable: |
% Sample multitable: |
2107 |
|
|
2108 |
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template} |
2109 |
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col |
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col |
2110 |
% @item |
% @item |
2111 |
% first col stuff |
% first col stuff |
2112 |
% @tab |
% @tab |
2113 |
% second col stuff |
% second col stuff |
2114 |
% @tab |
% @tab |
2115 |
% third col |
% third col |
2116 |
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff |
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff |
2117 |
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. |
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column. |
2118 |
% |
% |
2119 |
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. |
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template. |
2120 |
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. |
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column. |
2121 |
% @endmultitable |
% @end multitable |
2122 |
|
|
2123 |
% Default dimensions may be reset by user. |
% Default dimensions may be reset by user. |
2124 |
% @intableparskip will set vertical space between paragraphs in table. |
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table. |
2125 |
% @intableparindent will set paragraph indent in table. |
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table. |
2126 |
% @spacebetweencols will set horizontal space to be left between columns. |
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns. |
2127 |
% @spacebetweenlines will set vertical space to be left between lines. |
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline |
2128 |
|
% to baseline. |
2129 |
%%%% |
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing. |
2130 |
% Dimensions |
% |
2131 |
|
\newskip\multitableparskip |
2132 |
\newdimen\intableparskip |
\newskip\multitableparindent |
2133 |
\newdimen\intableparindent |
\newdimen\multitablecolspace |
2134 |
\newdimen\spacebetweencols |
\newskip\multitablelinespace |
2135 |
\newdimen\spacebetweenlines |
\multitableparskip=0pt |
2136 |
\intableparskip=0pt |
\multitableparindent=6pt |
2137 |
\intableparindent=6pt |
\multitablecolspace=12pt |
2138 |
\spacebetweencols=12pt |
\multitablelinespace=0pt |
|
\spacebetweenlines=12pt |
|
2139 |
|
|
|
%%%% |
|
2140 |
% Macros used to set up halign preamble: |
% Macros used to set up halign preamble: |
2141 |
|
% |
2142 |
\let\endsetuptable\relax |
\let\endsetuptable\relax |
2143 |
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} |
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable} |
2144 |
\let\percentofhsize\relax |
\let\columnfractions\relax |
2145 |
\def\xpercentofhsize{\percentofhsize} |
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions} |
2146 |
\newif\ifsetpercent |
\newif\ifsetpercent |
2147 |
|
|
2148 |
|
% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which |
2149 |
|
% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we |
2150 |
|
% just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the |
2151 |
|
% percent of \hsize for this column. |
2152 |
|
\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {% |
2153 |
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1 |
2154 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}% |
2155 |
|
\setuptable |
2156 |
|
} |
2157 |
|
|
2158 |
\newcount\colcount |
\newcount\colcount |
2159 |
\def\setuptable#1{\def\firstarg{#1}% |
\def\setuptable#1{% |
2160 |
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable\let\go\relax% |
\def\firstarg{#1}% |
2161 |
\else |
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable |
2162 |
\ifx\firstarg\xpercentofhsize\global\setpercenttrue% |
\let\go = \relax |
2163 |
\else |
\else |
2164 |
\ifsetpercent |
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions |
2165 |
\if#1.\else% |
\global\setpercenttrue |
2166 |
\global\advance\colcount by1 % |
\else |
2167 |
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#1\hsize}% |
\ifsetpercent |
2168 |
\fi |
\let\go\pickupwholefraction |
2169 |
|
\else |
2170 |
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1 |
2171 |
|
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator; |
2172 |
|
% typically that is always in the input, anyway. |
2173 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
2174 |
|
\fi |
2175 |
|
\fi |
2176 |
|
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction |
2177 |
|
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so |
2178 |
|
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed. |
2179 |
|
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}% |
2180 |
\else |
\else |
2181 |
\global\advance\colcount by1 |
\let\go = \setuptable |
|
\setbox0=\hbox{#1}% |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}% |
|
2182 |
\fi% |
\fi% |
2183 |
\fi% |
\fi |
2184 |
\let\go\setuptable% |
\go |
2185 |
\fi\go} |
} |
|
%%%% |
|
|
% multitable syntax |
|
|
\def\tab{&} |
|
|
|
|
|
%%%% |
|
|
% @multitable ... @endmultitable definitions: |
|
2186 |
|
|
2187 |
\def\multitable#1\item{\bgroup |
% multitable syntax |
2188 |
\let\item\cr |
\def\tab{&\hskip1sp\relax} % 2/2/96 |
2189 |
\tolerance=9500 |
% tiny skip here makes sure this column space is |
2190 |
\hbadness=9500 |
% maintained, even if it is never used. |
2191 |
\parskip=\intableparskip |
|
2192 |
\parindent=\intableparindent |
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions: |
2193 |
\overfullrule=0pt |
% |
2194 |
\global\colcount=0\relax% |
\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable} |
2195 |
\def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\global\everycr{}\cr\egroup\egroup}% |
\def\dotable#1{\bgroup |
2196 |
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item : |
\vskip\parskip |
2197 |
\def\one{#1}\expandafter\setuptable\one\endsetuptable |
\let\item\crcr |
2198 |
% Need to reset this to 0 after \setuptable. |
\tolerance=9500 |
2199 |
\global\colcount=0\relax% |
\hbadness=9500 |
2200 |
% |
\setmultitablespacing |
2201 |
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will |
\parskip=\multitableparskip |
2202 |
% be used as many times as user calls for columns. |
\parindent=\multitableparindent |
2203 |
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and |
\overfullrule=0pt |
2204 |
% continue for many paragraphs if desired. |
\global\colcount=0 |
2205 |
\halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax% |
\def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}% |
2206 |
\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname |
% |
2207 |
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other |
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item: |
2208 |
% we will add a \leftskip of \spacebetweencols to all columns after |
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable |
2209 |
% the first one. |
% |
2210 |
% If a template has been used, we will add \spacebetweencols |
% \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of |
2211 |
% to the width of each template entry. |
% each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. |
2212 |
% If user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
% The table preamble |
2213 |
% we will use that dimension as the width of the column, and |
% looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. |
2214 |
% the \leftskip will keep entries from bumping into each other. |
\everycr{\noalign{% |
2215 |
% Table will start at left margin and final column will justify at |
% |
2216 |
% right margin. |
% \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. |
2217 |
\ifnum\colcount=1 |
% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table |
2218 |
\else |
% breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem |
2219 |
\ifsetpercent |
% manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl. |
2220 |
|
\global\colcount=0\relax}}% |
2221 |
|
% |
2222 |
|
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will |
2223 |
|
% be used as many times as user calls for columns. |
2224 |
|
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and |
2225 |
|
% continue for many paragraphs if desired. |
2226 |
|
\halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax |
2227 |
|
\multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname |
2228 |
|
% |
2229 |
|
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other |
2230 |
|
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after |
2231 |
|
% the first one. |
2232 |
|
% |
2233 |
|
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace |
2234 |
|
% to the width of each template entry. |
2235 |
|
% |
2236 |
|
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will |
2237 |
|
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip |
2238 |
|
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at |
2239 |
|
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin. |
2240 |
|
% |
2241 |
|
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment. |
2242 |
|
\rightskip=0pt |
2243 |
|
\ifnum\colcount=1 |
2244 |
|
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text. |
2245 |
|
\advance\hsize by\leftskip |
2246 |
\else |
\else |
2247 |
% If user has <not> set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
\ifsetpercent \else |
2248 |
% we will advance \hsize by \spacebetweencols |
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize |
2249 |
\advance\hsize by \spacebetweencols |
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace. |
2250 |
|
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace |
2251 |
|
\fi |
2252 |
|
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace: |
2253 |
|
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace |
2254 |
\fi |
\fi |
2255 |
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\spacebetweencols: |
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious |
2256 |
\leftskip=\spacebetweencols |
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the |
2257 |
\fi |
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself. |
2258 |
\noindent##}\cr% |
% For example: |
2259 |
% \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of |
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89 |
2260 |
% each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one. |
% @item @code{#} |
2261 |
% The table preamble |
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country. |
2262 |
% looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width. |
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking |
2263 |
\global\everycr{\noalign{\nointerlineskip\vskip\spacebetweenlines |
% characters. |
2264 |
\filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages. |
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr |
2265 |
\global\colcount=0\relax}}} |
} |
2266 |
|
|
2267 |
|
\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace. |
2268 |
|
% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on |
2269 |
|
% current baselineskip. |
2270 |
|
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt |
2271 |
|
%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders, |
2272 |
|
%% to keep lines equally spaced |
2273 |
|
\let\multistrut = \strut |
2274 |
|
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of |
2275 |
|
%% table. If not, do nothing. |
2276 |
|
%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace. |
2277 |
|
\else |
2278 |
|
\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0 |
2279 |
|
width0pt\relax} \fi |
2280 |
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace |
2281 |
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
2282 |
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
2283 |
|
%% than skip between lines in the table. |
2284 |
|
\fi% |
2285 |
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt |
2286 |
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace |
2287 |
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller |
2288 |
|
%% than skip between lines in the table. |
2289 |
|
\fi} |
2290 |
|
|
2291 |
|
|
2292 |
\message{indexing,} |
\message{indexing,} |
2293 |
% Index generation facilities |
% Index generation facilities |
2301 |
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that |
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that |
2302 |
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. |
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo. |
2303 |
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for |
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for |
2304 |
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. |
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo. |
2305 |
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long |
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long |
2306 |
% for the sake of vms. |
% for the sake of vms. |
2307 |
|
% |
2308 |
\def\newindex #1{ |
\def\newindex#1{% |
2309 |
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file |
\iflinks |
2310 |
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname |
2311 |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
2312 |
\noexpand\doindex {#1}} |
\fi |
2313 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index |
2314 |
|
\noexpand\doindex{#1}} |
2315 |
} |
} |
2316 |
|
|
2317 |
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} |
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo} |
2320 |
|
|
2321 |
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. |
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code. |
2322 |
|
|
2323 |
\def\newcodeindex #1{ |
\def\newcodeindex#1{% |
2324 |
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname% Define number for output file |
\iflinks |
2325 |
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file |
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname |
2326 |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 |
2327 |
\noexpand\docodeindex {#1}} |
\fi |
2328 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% |
2329 |
|
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}} |
2330 |
} |
} |
2331 |
|
|
2332 |
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} |
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex} |
2333 |
|
|
2334 |
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. |
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar. |
2335 |
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. |
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index. |
2336 |
\def\synindex #1 #2 {% |
% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the |
2337 |
\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files. |
2338 |
\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
\def\synindex#1 #2 {% |
2339 |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
2340 |
\noexpand\doindex {#2}}% |
\expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname |
2341 |
|
\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
2342 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex |
2343 |
|
\noexpand\doindex{#2}}% |
2344 |
} |
} |
2345 |
|
|
2346 |
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo |
2347 |
% inside @code. |
% inside @code. |
2348 |
\def\syncodeindex #1 #2 {% |
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {% |
2349 |
\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
\expandafter\let\expandafter\synindexfoo\expandafter=\csname#2indfile\endcsname |
2350 |
\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
\expandafter\closeout\csname#1indfile\endcsname |
2351 |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define \xxxindex |
\expandafter\let\csname#1indfile\endcsname=\synindexfoo |
2352 |
\noexpand\docodeindex {#2}}% |
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% define \xxxindex |
2353 |
|
\noexpand\docodeindex{#2}}% |
2354 |
} |
} |
2355 |
|
|
2356 |
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. |
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros. |
2371 |
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} |
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}} |
2372 |
|
|
2373 |
\def\indexdummies{% |
\def\indexdummies{% |
2374 |
|
\def\ { }% |
2375 |
% Take care of the plain tex accent commands. |
% Take care of the plain tex accent commands. |
2376 |
\def\"{\realbackslash "}% |
\def\"{\realbackslash "}% |
2377 |
\def\`{\realbackslash `}% |
\def\`{\realbackslash `}% |
2398 |
\def\L{\realbackslash L}% |
\def\L{\realbackslash L}% |
2399 |
\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}% |
\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}% |
2400 |
% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry. |
% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry. |
2401 |
|
% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to |
2402 |
|
% laboriously list every single command here.) |
2403 |
|
\def\@{@}% will be @@ when we switch to @ as escape char. |
2404 |
|
% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again. |
2405 |
|
% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes |
2406 |
|
% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters. |
2407 |
|
\let\{ = \mylbrace |
2408 |
|
\let\} = \myrbrace |
2409 |
\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% |
\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}% |
2410 |
\def\w{\realbackslash w }% |
\def\w{\realbackslash w }% |
2411 |
\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% |
\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }% |
2412 |
\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }% |
%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }% |
2413 |
\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }% |
\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }% |
2414 |
\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}% |
\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}% |
2415 |
\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}% |
\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}% |
2416 |
\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% |
\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}% |
2417 |
\def\less{\realbackslash less}% |
\def\less{\realbackslash less}% |
2418 |
\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% |
\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}% |
|
\def\char{\realbackslash char}% |
|
2419 |
\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% |
\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}% |
2420 |
\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% |
\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }% |
2421 |
\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright }% |
\def\result{\realbackslash result}% |
2422 |
|
\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}% |
2423 |
|
\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}% |
2424 |
|
\def\print{\realbackslash print}% |
2425 |
|
\def\error{\realbackslash error}% |
2426 |
|
\def\point{\realbackslash point}% |
2427 |
|
\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}% |
2428 |
\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% |
\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}% |
2429 |
\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% |
\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}% |
2430 |
|
\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}% |
2431 |
|
\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}% |
2432 |
|
\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}% |
2433 |
|
\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}% |
2434 |
|
\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}% |
2435 |
|
\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}% |
2436 |
\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% |
\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}% |
2437 |
\def\t##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% |
\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}% |
2438 |
|
\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}% |
2439 |
\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% |
\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}% |
2440 |
\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% |
\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}% |
2441 |
\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% |
\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}% |
2442 |
|
\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}% |
2443 |
\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% |
\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}% |
2444 |
\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% |
\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}% |
2445 |
\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% |
\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}% |
2447 |
\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% |
\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}% |
2448 |
\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% |
\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}% |
2449 |
\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% |
\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}% |
2450 |
|
\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}% |
2451 |
|
% |
2452 |
|
% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not |
2453 |
|
% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any |
2454 |
|
% (non-fully-expandable) commands. |
2455 |
|
\let\value = \expandablevalue |
2456 |
|
% |
2457 |
|
\unsepspaces |
2458 |
} |
} |
2459 |
|
|
2460 |
|
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces |
2461 |
|
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the |
2462 |
|
% expansion of \tie (\\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ). |
2463 |
|
{\obeyspaces |
2464 |
|
\gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}} |
2465 |
|
|
2466 |
% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands. |
% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands. |
2467 |
% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by. |
% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by. |
2468 |
\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1} |
\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1} |
2471 |
|
|
2472 |
\def\indexnofonts{% |
\def\indexnofonts{% |
2473 |
% Just ignore accents. |
% Just ignore accents. |
2474 |
|
\let\,=\indexdummyfont |
2475 |
\let\"=\indexdummyfont |
\let\"=\indexdummyfont |
2476 |
\let\`=\indexdummyfont |
\let\`=\indexdummyfont |
2477 |
\let\'=\indexdummyfont |
\let\'=\indexdummyfont |
2484 |
\let\u=\indexdummyfont |
\let\u=\indexdummyfont |
2485 |
\let\v=\indexdummyfont |
\let\v=\indexdummyfont |
2486 |
\let\H=\indexdummyfont |
\let\H=\indexdummyfont |
2487 |
|
\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont |
2488 |
% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. |
% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters. |
2489 |
\def\oe{oe}% |
\def\oe{oe}% |
2490 |
\def\ae{ae}% |
\def\ae{ae}% |
2511 |
%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont |
%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont |
2512 |
\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont |
\let\tclose=\indexdummyfont |
2513 |
\let\code=\indexdummyfont |
\let\code=\indexdummyfont |
2514 |
|
\let\url=\indexdummyfont |
2515 |
|
\let\uref=\indexdummyfont |
2516 |
|
\let\env=\indexdummyfont |
2517 |
|
\let\command=\indexdummyfont |
2518 |
|
\let\option=\indexdummyfont |
2519 |
\let\file=\indexdummyfont |
\let\file=\indexdummyfont |
2520 |
\let\samp=\indexdummyfont |
\let\samp=\indexdummyfont |
2521 |
\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont |
\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont |
2523 |
\let\var=\indexdummyfont |
\let\var=\indexdummyfont |
2524 |
\let\TeX=\indexdummytex |
\let\TeX=\indexdummytex |
2525 |
\let\dots=\indexdummydots |
\let\dots=\indexdummydots |
2526 |
|
\def\@{@}% |
2527 |
} |
} |
2528 |
|
|
2529 |
% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape. |
% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape. |
2531 |
% so we do not become unable to do a definition. |
% so we do not become unable to do a definition. |
2532 |
|
|
2533 |
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other |
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other |
2534 |
@gdef@realbackslash{\}} |
@gdef@realbackslash{\}} |
2535 |
|
|
2536 |
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. |
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex. |
2537 |
|
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)? |
2538 |
|
|
2539 |
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax %initialize! |
% For \ifx comparisons. |
2540 |
% workhorse for all \fooindexes |
\def\emptymacro{\empty} |
2541 |
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there |
|
2542 |
\def\doind #1#2{% |
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case. |
2543 |
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
% |
2544 |
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else% |
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty} |
2545 |
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% |
|
2546 |
\fi% |
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes. |
2547 |
{\count10=\lastpenalty % |
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry -- |
2548 |
{\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception |
2549 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
% is with defuns, which call us directly. |
2550 |
{\let\folio=0% Expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio |
% |
2551 |
\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now |
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{% |
2552 |
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash in the indx. |
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired. |
2553 |
% |
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else |
2554 |
% Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off, |
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}% |
2555 |
% to get the string to sort the index by. |
\fi |
2556 |
{\indexnofonts |
{% |
2557 |
\xdef\temp1{#2}% |
\count255=\lastpenalty |
2558 |
}% |
{% |
2559 |
% Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again, |
\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
2560 |
% this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index. |
\escapechar=`\\ |
2561 |
\edef\temp{% |
{% |
2562 |
\write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{% |
\let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio. |
2563 |
\realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}}}% |
\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now |
2564 |
\temp }% |
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash. |
2565 |
}\penalty\count10}} |
% |
2566 |
|
\def\thirdarg{#3}% |
2567 |
\def\dosubind #1#2#3{% |
% |
2568 |
{\count10=\lastpenalty % |
% If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key. |
2569 |
{\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage |
\ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro |
2570 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\let\subentry = \empty |
2571 |
{\let\folio=0% |
\else |
2572 |
\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% |
\def\subentry{ #3}% |
2573 |
% |
\fi |
2574 |
% Now process the index-string once, with all font commands turned off, |
% |
2575 |
% to get the string to sort the index by. |
% First process the index-string with all font commands turned off |
2576 |
{\indexnofonts |
% to get the string to sort by. |
2577 |
\xdef\temp1{#2 #3}% |
{\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}% |
2578 |
}% |
% |
2579 |
% Now produce the complete index entry. We process the index-string again, |
% Now produce the complete index entry, with both the sort key and the |
2580 |
% this time with font commands expanded, to get what to print in the index. |
% original text, including any font commands. |
2581 |
\edef\temp{% |
\toks0 = {#2}% |
2582 |
\write \csname#1indfile\endcsname{% |
\edef\temp{% |
2583 |
\realbackslash entry {\temp1}{\folio}{#2}{#3}}}% |
\write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{% |
2584 |
\temp }% |
\realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}% |
2585 |
}\penalty\count10}} |
}% |
2586 |
|
% |
2587 |
|
% If third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index string. |
2588 |
|
\ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else |
2589 |
|
\toks0 = {#3}% |
2590 |
|
\edef\temp{\temp{\the\toks0}}% |
2591 |
|
\fi |
2592 |
|
% |
2593 |
|
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it |
2594 |
|
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting |
2595 |
|
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the |
2596 |
|
% \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences |
2597 |
|
% like this: |
2598 |
|
% @end defun |
2599 |
|
% @tindex whatever |
2600 |
|
% @defun ... |
2601 |
|
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the |
2602 |
|
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of |
2603 |
|
% the previous defun. |
2604 |
|
% |
2605 |
|
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We |
2606 |
|
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph. |
2607 |
|
% |
2608 |
|
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too. |
2609 |
|
% |
2610 |
|
\iflinks |
2611 |
|
\ifvmode |
2612 |
|
\skip0 = \lastskip |
2613 |
|
\ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi |
2614 |
|
\fi |
2615 |
|
% |
2616 |
|
\temp % do the write |
2617 |
|
% |
2618 |
|
% |
2619 |
|
\ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi |
2620 |
|
\fi |
2621 |
|
}% |
2622 |
|
}% |
2623 |
|
\penalty\count255 |
2624 |
|
}% |
2625 |
|
} |
2626 |
|
|
2627 |
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like |
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like |
2628 |
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} |
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic} |
2656 |
|
|
2657 |
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. |
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material. |
2658 |
|
|
2659 |
% This is what you call to cause a particular index to get printed. |
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed. |
2660 |
% Write |
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered). |
2661 |
% @unnumbered Function Index |
% |
|
% @printindex fn |
|
|
|
|
2662 |
\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} |
\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex} |
2663 |
|
\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup |
2664 |
\def\doprintindex#1{% |
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}% |
|
\tex |
|
|
\dobreak \chapheadingskip {10000} |
|
|
\catcode`\%=\other\catcode`\&=\other\catcode`\#=\other |
|
|
\catcode`\$=\other |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other |
|
|
\indexbreaks |
|
2665 |
% |
% |
2666 |
% The following don't help, since the chars were translated |
\indexfonts \rm |
2667 |
% when the raw index was written, and their fonts were discarded |
\tolerance = 9500 |
2668 |
% due to \indexnofonts. |
\indexbreaks |
|
%\catcode`\"=\active |
|
|
%\catcode`\^=\active |
|
|
%\catcode`\_=\active |
|
|
%\catcode`\|=\active |
|
|
%\catcode`\<=\active |
|
|
%\catcode`\>=\active |
|
|
% % |
|
|
\def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx} |
|
|
\indexfonts\rm \tolerance=9500 \advance\baselineskip -1pt |
|
|
\begindoublecolumns |
|
2669 |
% |
% |
2670 |
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty. |
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty. |
2671 |
|
% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains |
2672 |
|
% \initial {@} |
2673 |
|
% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces |
2674 |
|
% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence). |
2675 |
|
\catcode`\@ = 11 |
2676 |
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s |
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s |
2677 |
\ifeof 1 |
\ifeof 1 |
2678 |
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, |
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index, |
2680 |
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure |
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure |
2681 |
% there is some text. |
% there is some text. |
2682 |
(Index is nonexistent) |
(Index is nonexistent) |
2683 |
\else |
\else |
2684 |
% |
% |
2685 |
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof |
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof |
2686 |
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so |
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so |
2689 |
\ifeof 1 |
\ifeof 1 |
2690 |
(Index is empty) |
(Index is empty) |
2691 |
\else |
\else |
2692 |
|
% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape |
2693 |
|
% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change |
2694 |
|
% to make right now. |
2695 |
|
\def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}% |
2696 |
|
\catcode`\\ = 0 |
2697 |
|
\escapechar = `\\ |
2698 |
|
\begindoublecolumns |
2699 |
\input \jobname.#1s |
\input \jobname.#1s |
2700 |
|
\enddoublecolumns |
2701 |
\fi |
\fi |
2702 |
\fi |
\fi |
2703 |
\closein 1 |
\closein 1 |
2704 |
\enddoublecolumns |
\endgroup} |
|
\Etex |
|
|
} |
|
2705 |
|
|
2706 |
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. |
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself. |
2707 |
% Change them to control the appearance of the index. |
% Change them to control the appearance of the index. |
2708 |
|
|
2709 |
% Same as \bigskipamount except no shrink. |
\def\initial#1{{% |
2710 |
% \balancecolumns gets confused if there is any shrink. |
% Some minor font changes for the special characters. |
2711 |
\newskip\initialskipamount \initialskipamount 12pt plus4pt |
\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt |
2712 |
|
% |
2713 |
\def\initial #1{% |
% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own. |
2714 |
{\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt |
\removelastskip |
2715 |
\ifdim\lastskip<\initialskipamount |
% |
2716 |
\removelastskip \penalty-200 \vskip \initialskipamount\fi |
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus. |
2717 |
\line{\secbf#1\hfill}\kern 2pt\penalty10000}} |
\penalty -300 |
2718 |
|
% |
2719 |
|
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of |
2720 |
|
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column |
2721 |
|
% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch |
2722 |
|
% we need before each entry, but it's better. |
2723 |
|
% |
2724 |
|
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns. |
2725 |
|
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip |
2726 |
|
\leftline{\secbf #1}% |
2727 |
|
\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip |
2728 |
|
% |
2729 |
|
% Do our best not to break after the initial. |
2730 |
|
\nobreak |
2731 |
|
}} |
2732 |
|
|
2733 |
% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 |
% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2 |
2734 |
% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents |
% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents |
2735 |
% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. |
% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip. |
2736 |
% |
% |
2737 |
\def\entry #1#2{\begingroup |
\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup |
2738 |
% |
% |
2739 |
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't |
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't |
2740 |
% affect previous text. |
% affect previous text. |
2757 |
% |
% |
2758 |
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start |
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start |
2759 |
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. |
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that. |
2760 |
\hangindent=2em |
\hangindent = 2em |
2761 |
% |
% |
2762 |
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line |
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line |
2763 |
% with blank space. |
% with blank space. |
2764 |
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil |
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil |
2765 |
% |
% |
2766 |
|
% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns. |
2767 |
|
\vskip 0pt plus1pt |
2768 |
|
% |
2769 |
% Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking |
% Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking |
2770 |
% parameters we've set above will have an effect. |
% parameters we've set above will have an effect. |
2771 |
\noindent |
\noindent |
2772 |
% |
% |
2773 |
% Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it. |
% Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it. |
2774 |
#1% |
#1% |
2775 |
% The following is kluged to not output a line of dots in the index if |
% The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if |
2776 |
% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be |
% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be |
2777 |
% cursed by a Unix daemon. |
% cursed by a Unix daemon. |
2778 |
\def\tempa{{\rm }}% |
\def\tempa{{\rm }}% |
2809 |
\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par |
\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill #2\par |
2810 |
}} |
}} |
2811 |
|
|
2812 |
%% Define two-column mode, which is used in indexes. |
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes. |
2813 |
%% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416. |
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say, |
2814 |
\catcode `\@=11 |
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself. |
2815 |
|
\catcode`\@=11 |
2816 |
|
|
2817 |
\newbox\partialpage |
\newbox\partialpage |
|
|
|
2818 |
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize |
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize |
2819 |
|
|
2820 |
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup |
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns |
2821 |
% Grab any single-column material above us. |
% Grab any single-column material above us. |
2822 |
\output = {\global\setbox\partialpage |
\output = {\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{% |
2823 |
=\vbox{\unvbox255\kern -\topskip \kern \baselineskip}}% |
% |
2824 |
\eject |
% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a |
2825 |
|
% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output |
2826 |
|
% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is |
2827 |
|
% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In |
2828 |
|
% that case, we must prevent the second \partialpage from |
2829 |
|
% simply overwriting the first, causing us to lose the page. |
2830 |
|
% This will preserve it until a real output routine can ship it |
2831 |
|
% out. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this runs and |
2832 |
|
% this will be a no-op. |
2833 |
|
\unvbox\partialpage |
2834 |
|
% |
2835 |
|
% Unvbox the main output page. |
2836 |
|
\unvbox255 |
2837 |
|
\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip |
2838 |
|
}}% |
2839 |
|
\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage |
2840 |
% |
% |
2841 |
% Now switch to the double-column output routine. |
% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages. |
2842 |
\output={\doublecolumnout}% |
\output = {\doublecolumnout}% |
2843 |
% |
% |
2844 |
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this |
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this |
2845 |
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 |
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11 |
2846 |
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple |
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple |
2847 |
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the |
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the |
2848 |
% execution time, so we may as well do it once. |
% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place. |
2849 |
% |
% |
2850 |
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between |
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between |
2851 |
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it |
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it |
2852 |
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant |
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant |
2853 |
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +- < |
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt) |
2854 |
% 1pt) as it did when we hard-coded it. |
% as it did when we hard-coded it. |
2855 |
% |
% |
2856 |
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we |
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we |
2857 |
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) |
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially) |
2864 |
% |
% |
2865 |
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, |
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here, |
2866 |
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.) |
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.) |
2867 |
|
\advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage |
2868 |
\vsize = 2\vsize |
\vsize = 2\vsize |
|
\doublecolumnpagegoal |
|
2869 |
} |
} |
2870 |
|
|
2871 |
\def\enddoublecolumns{\eject \endgroup \pagegoal=\vsize \unvbox\partialpage} |
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except |
2872 |
|
% the last. |
2873 |
\def\doublecolumnsplit{\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth |
% |
|
\global\dimen@=\pageheight \global\advance\dimen@ by-\ht\partialpage |
|
|
\global\setbox1=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \global\setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox1} |
|
|
\global\setbox3=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \global\setbox2=\vbox{\unvbox3} |
|
|
\ifdim\ht0>\dimen@ \setbox255=\vbox{\unvbox0\unvbox2} \global\setbox255=\copy5 \fi |
|
|
\ifdim\ht2>\dimen@ \setbox255=\vbox{\unvbox0\unvbox2} \global\setbox255=\copy5 \fi |
|
|
} |
|
|
\def\doublecolumnpagegoal{% |
|
|
\dimen@=\vsize \advance\dimen@ by-2\ht\partialpage \global\pagegoal=\dimen@ |
|
|
} |
|
|
\def\pagesofar{\unvbox\partialpage % |
|
|
\hsize=\doublecolumnhsize % have to restore this since output routine |
|
|
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}} |
|
2874 |
\def\doublecolumnout{% |
\def\doublecolumnout{% |
2875 |
\setbox5=\copy255 |
\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth |
2876 |
{\vbadness=10000 \doublecolumnsplit} |
% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal |
2877 |
\ifvbox255 |
% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the |
2878 |
\setbox0=\vtop to\dimen@{\unvbox0} |
% previous page. |
2879 |
\setbox2=\vtop to\dimen@{\unvbox2} |
\dimen@ = \vsize |
2880 |
\onepageout\pagesofar \unvbox255 \penalty\outputpenalty |
\divide\dimen@ by 2 |
2881 |
\else |
% |
2882 |
\setbox0=\vbox{\unvbox5} |
% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right. |
2883 |
\ifvbox0 |
\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ |
2884 |
\dimen@=\ht0 \advance\dimen@ by\topskip \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip |
\onepageout\pagesofar |
2885 |
\divide\dimen@ by2 \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth |
\unvbox255 |
2886 |
{\vbadness=10000 |
\penalty\outputpenalty |
2887 |
\loop \global\setbox5=\copy0 |
} |
2888 |
\setbox1=\vsplit5 to\dimen@ |
\def\pagesofar{% |
2889 |
\setbox3=\vsplit5 to\dimen@ |
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material, |
2890 |
\ifvbox5 \global\advance\dimen@ by1pt \repeat |
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2. |
2891 |
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1} |
\advance\vsize by \ht\partialpage |
2892 |
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3} |
\unvbox\partialpage |
2893 |
\global\setbox\partialpage=\vbox{\pagesofar} |
% |
2894 |
\doublecolumnpagegoal |
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize |
2895 |
} |
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize |
2896 |
\fi |
\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}% |
2897 |
\fi |
} |
2898 |
|
\def\enddoublecolumns{% |
2899 |
|
\output = {% |
2900 |
|
% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the |
2901 |
|
% current page, no automatic page break. |
2902 |
|
\balancecolumns |
2903 |
|
% |
2904 |
|
% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page, |
2905 |
|
% though, there will be another page break right after this \output |
2906 |
|
% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not |
2907 |
|
% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal |
2908 |
|
% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be |
2909 |
|
% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes |
2910 |
|
% the output somewhat more palatable.) |
2911 |
|
\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}% |
2912 |
|
}% |
2913 |
|
\eject |
2914 |
|
\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns |
2915 |
|
% |
2916 |
|
% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted |
2917 |
|
% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column |
2918 |
|
% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the |
2919 |
|
% \endgroup where \vsize got restored). |
2920 |
|
\pagegoal = \vsize |
2921 |
|
} |
2922 |
|
\def\balancecolumns{% |
2923 |
|
% Called at the end of the double column material. |
2924 |
|
\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120. |
2925 |
|
\dimen@ = \ht0 |
2926 |
|
\advance\dimen@ by \topskip |
2927 |
|
\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip |
2928 |
|
\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to |
2929 |
|
%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}% |
2930 |
|
\splittopskip = \topskip |
2931 |
|
% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint. |
2932 |
|
{% |
2933 |
|
\vbadness = 10000 |
2934 |
|
\loop |
2935 |
|
\global\setbox3 = \copy0 |
2936 |
|
\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@ |
2937 |
|
\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@ |
2938 |
|
\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt |
2939 |
|
\repeat |
2940 |
|
}% |
2941 |
|
%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}% |
2942 |
|
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}% |
2943 |
|
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}% |
2944 |
|
% |
2945 |
|
\pagesofar |
2946 |
} |
} |
2947 |
|
\catcode`\@ = \other |
2948 |
|
|
2949 |
|
|
|
\catcode `\@=\other |
|
2950 |
\message{sectioning,} |
\message{sectioning,} |
2951 |
% Define chapters, sections, etc. |
% Define chapters, sections, etc. |
2952 |
|
|
2953 |
\newcount \chapno |
\newcount\chapno |
2954 |
\newcount \secno \secno=0 |
\newcount\secno \secno=0 |
2955 |
\newcount \subsecno \subsecno=0 |
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0 |
2956 |
\newcount \subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 |
\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0 |
2957 |
|
|
2958 |
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... |
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ... |
2959 |
\newcount \appendixno \appendixno = `\@ |
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@ |
2960 |
\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
\def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno} |
2961 |
|
|
|
\newwrite \contentsfile |
|
|
% This is called from \setfilename. |
|
|
\def\opencontents{\openout \contentsfile = \jobname.toc} |
|
|
|
|
2962 |
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. |
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter. |
2963 |
% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise |
% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise. |
2964 |
|
\def\thischapter{} |
2965 |
\def\thischapter{} \def\thissection{} |
\def\thissection{} |
|
\def\seccheck#1{\if \pageno<0 % |
|
|
\errmessage{@#1 not allowed after generating table of contents}\fi |
|
|
% |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
\def\chapternofonts{% |
|
|
\let\rawbackslash=\relax% |
|
|
\let\frenchspacing=\relax% |
|
|
\def\result{\realbackslash result} |
|
|
\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv} |
|
|
\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion} |
|
|
\def\print{\realbackslash print} |
|
|
\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX} |
|
|
\def\dots{\realbackslash dots} |
|
|
\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright} |
|
|
\def\tt{\realbackslash tt} |
|
|
\def\bf{\realbackslash bf } |
|
|
\def\w{\realbackslash w} |
|
|
\def\less{\realbackslash less} |
|
|
\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr} |
|
|
\def\hat{\realbackslash hat} |
|
|
\def\char{\realbackslash char} |
|
|
\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}} |
|
|
\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}} |
|
|
\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}} |
|
|
\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}} |
|
|
\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}} |
|
|
\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}} |
|
|
\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}} |
|
|
\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}} |
|
|
% These are redefined because @smartitalic wouldn't work inside xdef. |
|
|
\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}} |
|
|
\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}} |
|
|
\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}} |
|
|
\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}} |
|
|
\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}} |
|
|
} |
|
2966 |
|
|
2967 |
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level |
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level |
2968 |
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count |
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count |
3034 |
\fi |
\fi |
3035 |
} |
} |
3036 |
|
|
3037 |
|
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. |
3038 |
\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} |
\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title} |
3039 |
\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} |
\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy} |
3040 |
\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz |
\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz |
3041 |
\def\chapterzzz #1{\seccheck{chapter}% |
\def\chapterzzz #1{% |
3042 |
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
3043 |
\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter \the\chapno}% |
\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}% |
3044 |
\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% |
\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}% |
3045 |
\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
3046 |
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
3047 |
% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter |
% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter |
3048 |
% because we don't want its macros evaluated now. |
% because we don't want its macros evaluated now. |
3049 |
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
3050 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3051 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry {#1}{\the\chapno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% |
3052 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
{\the\chapno}}}% |
3053 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\temp |
3054 |
\donoderef % |
\donoderef |
3055 |
\global\let\section = \numberedsec |
\global\let\section = \numberedsec |
3056 |
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec |
3057 |
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec |
3058 |
}} |
} |
3059 |
|
|
3060 |
\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} |
\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy} |
3061 |
\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz |
\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz |
3062 |
\def\appendixzzz #1{\seccheck{appendix}% |
\def\appendixzzz #1{% |
3063 |
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
3064 |
\global\advance \appendixno by 1 \message{Appendix \appendixletter}% |
\global\advance \appendixno by 1 |
3065 |
|
\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}% |
3066 |
\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% |
\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}% |
3067 |
\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
3068 |
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}% |
3069 |
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}% |
3070 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3071 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash chapentry |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}% |
3072 |
{#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}}}% |
3073 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
3074 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\appendixnoderef |
|
\appendixnoderef % |
|
3075 |
\global\let\section = \appendixsec |
\global\let\section = \appendixsec |
3076 |
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec |
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec |
3077 |
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec |
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec |
3078 |
}} |
} |
3079 |
|
|
3080 |
|
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered. |
3081 |
|
\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy} |
3082 |
|
\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}} |
3083 |
|
|
3084 |
|
% @top is like @unnumbered. |
3085 |
\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
3086 |
|
|
3087 |
\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy} |
3088 |
\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz |
\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz |
3089 |
\def\unnumberedzzz #1{\seccheck{unnumbered}% |
\def\unnumberedzzz #1{% |
3090 |
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 |
3091 |
% |
% |
3092 |
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the |
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the |
3098 |
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear |
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear |
3099 |
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use |
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use |
3100 |
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, |
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once, |
3101 |
% simply yielding the contents of the <toks register>. |
% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for |
3102 |
|
% the toc entries.) |
3103 |
\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% |
\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}% |
3104 |
% |
% |
3105 |
\unnumbchapmacro {#1}% |
\unnumbchapmacro {#1}% |
3106 |
\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
3107 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3108 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry {#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}% |
3109 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
3110 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\unnumbnoderef |
|
\unnumbnoderef % |
|
3111 |
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec |
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec |
3112 |
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec |
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec |
3113 |
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec |
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec |
3114 |
}} |
} |
3115 |
|
|
3116 |
|
% Sections. |
3117 |
\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} |
\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy} |
3118 |
\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz |
3119 |
\def\seczzz #1{\seccheck{section}% |
\def\seczzz #1{% |
3120 |
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
3121 |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}% |
3122 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3123 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% |
3124 |
{#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}% |
3125 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
3126 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\donoderef |
3127 |
\donoderef % |
\nobreak |
3128 |
\penalty 10000 % |
} |
|
}} |
|
3129 |
|
|
3130 |
\outer\def\appenixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
3131 |
\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy} |
3132 |
\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz |
\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz |
3133 |
\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsection}% |
\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{% |
3134 |
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 % |
3135 |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}% |
3136 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3137 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash secentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}% |
3138 |
{#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}% |
3139 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
3140 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\appendixnoderef |
3141 |
\appendixnoderef % |
\nobreak |
3142 |
\penalty 10000 % |
} |
|
}} |
|
3143 |
|
|
3144 |
\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} |
\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy} |
3145 |
\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz |
\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz |
3146 |
\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsec}% |
\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{% |
3147 |
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
3148 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3149 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry{\the\toks0}}}% |
3150 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
3151 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\unnumbnoderef |
3152 |
\unnumbnoderef % |
\nobreak |
3153 |
\penalty 10000 % |
} |
|
}} |
|
3154 |
|
|
3155 |
|
% Subsections. |
3156 |
\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy} |
3157 |
\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz |
3158 |
\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsection}% |
\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{% |
3159 |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
3160 |
\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
3161 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3162 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% |
3163 |
{#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% |
3164 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
3165 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\donoderef |
3166 |
\donoderef % |
\nobreak |
3167 |
\penalty 10000 % |
} |
|
}} |
|
3168 |
|
|
3169 |
\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy} |
3170 |
\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz |
\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz |
3171 |
\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsec}% |
\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{% |
3172 |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 % |
3173 |
\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}% |
3174 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3175 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsecentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}% |
3176 |
{#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}% |
3177 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\temp |
3178 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\appendixnoderef |
3179 |
\appendixnoderef % |
\nobreak |
3180 |
\penalty 10000 % |
} |
|
}} |
|
3181 |
|
|
3182 |
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy} |
3183 |
\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz |
\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz |
3184 |
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsec}% |
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{% |
3185 |
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
3186 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3187 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry% |
3188 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
{\the\toks0}}}% |
3189 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\temp |
3190 |
\unnumbnoderef % |
\unnumbnoderef |
3191 |
\penalty 10000 % |
\nobreak |
3192 |
}} |
} |
3193 |
|
|
3194 |
|
% Subsubsections. |
3195 |
\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy} |
3196 |
\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz |
3197 |
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{subsubsection}% |
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{% |
3198 |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
3199 |
\subsubsecheading {#1} |
\subsubsecheading {#1} |
3200 |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
3201 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3202 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry % |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% |
3203 |
{#1} |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% |
3204 |
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno} |
\temp |
3205 |
{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\donoderef |
3206 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\nobreak |
3207 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
} |
|
\donoderef % |
|
|
\penalty 10000 % |
|
|
}} |
|
3208 |
|
|
3209 |
\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy} |
3210 |
\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz |
\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz |
3211 |
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{appendixsubsubsec}% |
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{% |
3212 |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 % |
3213 |
\subsubsecheading {#1} |
\subsubsecheading {#1} |
3214 |
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}% |
3215 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3216 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{#1}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}% |
3217 |
{\appendixletter} |
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}% |
3218 |
{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\temp |
3219 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
\appendixnoderef |
3220 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\nobreak |
3221 |
\appendixnoderef % |
} |
|
\penalty 10000 % |
|
|
}} |
|
3222 |
|
|
3223 |
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} |
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy} |
3224 |
\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz |
\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz |
3225 |
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{\seccheck{unnumberedsubsubsec}% |
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{% |
3226 |
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}% |
3227 |
{\chapternofonts% |
\toks0 = {#1}% |
3228 |
\edef\temp{{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry{#1}{\noexpand\folio}}}% |
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry% |
3229 |
\escapechar=`\\% |
{\the\toks0}}}% |
3230 |
\write \contentsfile \temp % |
\temp |
3231 |
\unnumbnoderef % |
\unnumbnoderef |
3232 |
\penalty 10000 % |
\nobreak |
3233 |
}} |
} |
3234 |
|
|
3235 |
% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. |
% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo. |
3236 |
% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. |
% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work. |
3259 |
|
|
3260 |
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading |
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading |
3261 |
|
|
3262 |
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and |
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such: |
3263 |
% such: |
% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit |
3264 |
% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit |
% overlong headings to fold. |
3265 |
% overlong headings to fold. |
% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a |
3266 |
% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a |
% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. |
|
% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it. |
|
3267 |
% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and |
% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and |
3268 |
% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. |
% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright. |
3269 |
|
|
3281 |
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
3282 |
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} |
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200} |
3283 |
|
|
3284 |
\def\heading{\parsearg\secheadingi} |
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading. |
3285 |
|
\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading} |
3286 |
\def\subheading{\parsearg\subsecheadingi} |
\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading} |
3287 |
|
\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading} |
|
\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\subsubsecheadingi} |
|
3288 |
|
|
3289 |
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only |
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only |
3290 |
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), |
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it), |
3298 |
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it |
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it |
3299 |
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) |
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed) |
3300 |
|
|
3301 |
\newskip \chapheadingskip \chapheadingskip = 30pt plus 8pt minus 4pt |
\newskip\chapheadingskip |
3302 |
|
|
3303 |
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} |
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}} |
3304 |
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} |
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject} |
3306 |
|
|
3307 |
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} |
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname} |
3308 |
|
|
3309 |
\def\CHAPPAGoff{ |
\def\CHAPPAGoff{% |
3310 |
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
3311 |
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak |
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak |
3312 |
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} |
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager} |
3313 |
|
|
3314 |
\def\CHAPPAGon{ |
\def\CHAPPAGon{% |
3315 |
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager |
3316 |
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager |
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager |
3317 |
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager |
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager |
3318 |
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} |
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}} |
3319 |
|
|
3320 |
\def\CHAPPAGodd{ |
\def\CHAPPAGodd{ |
3321 |
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage |
3322 |
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage |
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage |
3323 |
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage |
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage |
3324 |
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} |
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}} |
3327 |
|
|
3328 |
\def\CHAPFplain{ |
\def\CHAPFplain{ |
3329 |
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain |
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain |
3330 |
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain} |
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain |
3331 |
|
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain} |
3332 |
|
|
3333 |
\def\chfplain #1#2{% |
% Plain chapter opening. |
3334 |
|
% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered. |
3335 |
|
\def\chfplain#1#2{% |
3336 |
\pchapsepmacro |
\pchapsepmacro |
3337 |
{% |
{% |
3338 |
\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
\chapfonts \rm |
3339 |
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
\def\chapnum{#2}% |
3340 |
\rm #2\enspace #1}% |
\setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% |
3341 |
|
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
3342 |
|
\hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe |
3343 |
|
\unhbox0 #1\par}% |
3344 |
}% |
}% |
3345 |
\bigskip |
\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title |
3346 |
\penalty5000 |
\nobreak |
3347 |
} |
} |
3348 |
|
|
3349 |
\def\unnchfplain #1{% |
% Plain opening for unnumbered. |
3350 |
\pchapsepmacro % |
\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}} |
3351 |
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
|
3352 |
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered. |
3353 |
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % |
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax |
3354 |
} |
\def\centerchfplain#1{{% |
3355 |
|
\def\centerparametersmaybe{% |
3356 |
|
\advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip |
3357 |
|
\leftskip = \rightskip |
3358 |
|
\parfillskip = 0pt |
3359 |
|
}% |
3360 |
|
\chfplain{#1}{}% |
3361 |
|
}} |
3362 |
|
|
3363 |
\CHAPFplain % The default |
\CHAPFplain % The default |
3364 |
|
|
3365 |
\def\unnchfopen #1{% |
\def\unnchfopen #1{% |
3366 |
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
3367 |
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
3368 |
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 10000 % |
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
3369 |
} |
} |
3370 |
|
|
3371 |
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts |
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts |
3373 |
\par\penalty 5000 % |
\par\penalty 5000 % |
3374 |
} |
} |
3375 |
|
|
3376 |
|
\def\centerchfopen #1{% |
3377 |
|
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
3378 |
|
\parindent=0pt |
3379 |
|
\hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak |
3380 |
|
} |
3381 |
|
|
3382 |
\def\CHAPFopen{ |
\def\CHAPFopen{ |
3383 |
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen |
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen |
3384 |
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen} |
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen |
3385 |
|
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen} |
|
% Parameter controlling skip before section headings. |
|
3386 |
|
|
|
\newskip \subsecheadingskip \subsecheadingskip = 17pt plus 8pt minus 4pt |
|
|
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}} |
|
3387 |
|
|
3388 |
\newskip \secheadingskip \secheadingskip = 21pt plus 8pt minus 4pt |
% Section titles. |
3389 |
|
\newskip\secheadingskip |
3390 |
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}} |
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}} |
3391 |
|
\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}} |
3392 |
|
\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}} |
3393 |
|
|
3394 |
% @paragraphindent is defined for the Info formatting commands only. |
% Subsection titles. |
3395 |
\let\paragraphindent=\comment |
\newskip \subsecheadingskip |
3396 |
|
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}} |
3397 |
|
\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}} |
3398 |
|
\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}} |
3399 |
|
|
3400 |
% Section fonts are the base font at magstep2, which produces |
% Subsubsection titles. |
3401 |
% a size a bit more than 14 points in the default situation. |
\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip |
3402 |
|
\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak |
3403 |
|
\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}} |
3404 |
|
\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}} |
3405 |
|
|
|
\def\secheading #1#2#3{\secheadingi {#2.#3\enspace #1}} |
|
|
\def\plainsecheading #1{\secheadingi {#1}} |
|
|
\def\secheadingi #1{{\advance \secheadingskip by \parskip % |
|
|
\secheadingbreak}% |
|
|
{\secfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}% |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000 } |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
% Subsection fonts are the base font at magstep1, |
|
|
% which produces a size of 12 points. |
|
|
|
|
|
\def\subsecheading #1#2#3#4{\subsecheadingi {#2.#3.#4\enspace #1}} |
|
|
\def\subsecheadingi #1{{\advance \subsecheadingskip by \parskip % |
|
|
\subsecheadingbreak}% |
|
|
{\subsecfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}% |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000 } |
|
|
|
|
|
\def\subsubsecfonts{\subsecfonts} % Maybe this should change: |
|
|
% Perhaps make sssec fonts scaled |
|
|
% magstep half |
|
|
\def\subsubsecheading #1#2#3#4#5{\subsubsecheadingi {#2.#3.#4.#5\enspace #1}} |
|
|
\def\subsubsecheadingi #1{{\advance \subsecheadingskip by \parskip % |
|
|
\subsecheadingbreak}% |
|
|
{\subsubsecfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}% |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip<10pt \kern 10pt\kern -\parskip\fi \penalty 10000} |
|
3406 |
|
|
3407 |
|
% Print any size section title. |
3408 |
|
% |
3409 |
|
% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section |
3410 |
|
% number (maybe empty), #3 the text. |
3411 |
|
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{% |
3412 |
|
{% |
3413 |
|
\expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip |
3414 |
|
\csname #1headingbreak\endcsname |
3415 |
|
}% |
3416 |
|
{% |
3417 |
|
% Switch to the right set of fonts. |
3418 |
|
\csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm |
3419 |
|
% |
3420 |
|
% Only insert the separating space if we have a section number. |
3421 |
|
\def\secnum{#2}% |
3422 |
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}% |
3423 |
|
% |
3424 |
|
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright |
3425 |
|
\hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number |
3426 |
|
\unhbox0 #3}% |
3427 |
|
}% |
3428 |
|
\ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak |
3429 |
|
} |
3430 |
|
|
|
\message{toc printing,} |
|
3431 |
|
|
3432 |
% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written |
\message{toc,} |
3433 |
% to \contentsfile. |
\newwrite\tocfile |
3434 |
|
|
3435 |
|
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary. |
3436 |
|
% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the |
3437 |
|
% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro. |
3438 |
|
% |
3439 |
|
% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other |
3440 |
|
% given time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere. |
3441 |
|
% |
3442 |
|
\newif\iftocfileopened |
3443 |
|
\def\writetocentry#1{% |
3444 |
|
\iftocfileopened\else |
3445 |
|
\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc |
3446 |
|
\global\tocfileopenedtrue |
3447 |
|
\fi |
3448 |
|
\iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi |
3449 |
|
} |
3450 |
|
|
3451 |
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in |
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in |
3452 |
|
\newcount\savepageno |
3453 |
|
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1 |
3454 |
|
|
3455 |
|
% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written |
3456 |
|
% to \tocfile. |
3457 |
|
% |
3458 |
\def\startcontents#1{% |
\def\startcontents#1{% |
3459 |
\pagealignmacro |
% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should |
3460 |
\immediate\closeout \contentsfile |
% start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain |
3461 |
\ifnum \pageno>0 |
% \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro. |
3462 |
\pageno = -1 % Request roman numbered pages. |
% From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se> |
3463 |
\fi |
\contentsalignmacro |
3464 |
|
\immediate\closeout\tocfile |
3465 |
|
% |
3466 |
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. |
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline. |
3467 |
% It is abundantly clear what they are. |
% It is abundantly clear what they are. |
3468 |
\unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% |
\unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}% |
3469 |
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. |
\savepageno = \pageno |
3470 |
|
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly. |
3471 |
\catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 |
\catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11 |
3472 |
\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi |
% We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section |
3473 |
|
% title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97. |
3474 |
|
%\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi |
3475 |
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. |
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom. |
3476 |
\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. |
\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length. |
3477 |
|
% |
3478 |
|
% Roman numerals for page numbers. |
3479 |
|
\ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi |
3480 |
} |
} |
3481 |
|
|
3482 |
|
|
3483 |
% Normal (long) toc. |
% Normal (long) toc. |
3484 |
\outer\def\contents{% |
\def\contents{% |
3485 |
\startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}% |
\startcontents{\putwordTableofContents}% |
3486 |
\input \jobname.toc |
\openin 1 \jobname.toc |
3487 |
|
\ifeof 1 \else |
3488 |
|
\closein 1 |
3489 |
|
\input \jobname.toc |
3490 |
|
\fi |
3491 |
|
\vfill \eject |
3492 |
\endgroup |
\endgroup |
3493 |
\vfill \eject |
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno |
3494 |
|
\pageno = \savepageno |
3495 |
} |
} |
3496 |
|
|
3497 |
% And just the chapters. |
% And just the chapters. |
3498 |
\outer\def\summarycontents{% |
\def\summarycontents{% |
3499 |
\startcontents{\putwordShortContents}% |
\startcontents{\putwordShortContents}% |
3500 |
% |
% |
3501 |
\let\chapentry = \shortchapentry |
\let\chapentry = \shortchapentry |
3504 |
\secfonts |
\secfonts |
3505 |
\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl |
\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl |
3506 |
\rm |
\rm |
3507 |
|
\hyphenpenalty = 10000 |
3508 |
\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. |
\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little. |
3509 |
\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{} |
\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{} |
3510 |
\def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} |
\def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2{} |
3512 |
\def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
\def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
3513 |
\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} |
\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{} |
3514 |
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2{} |
3515 |
\input \jobname.toc |
\openin 1 \jobname.toc |
3516 |
|
\ifeof 1 \else |
3517 |
|
\closein 1 |
3518 |
|
\input \jobname.toc |
3519 |
|
\fi |
3520 |
|
\vfill \eject |
3521 |
\endgroup |
\endgroup |
3522 |
\vfill \eject |
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno |
3523 |
|
\pageno = \savepageno |
3524 |
} |
} |
3525 |
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents |
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents |
3526 |
|
|
3554 |
% This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the |
% This space should be plenty, since a single number is .5em, and the |
3555 |
% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. |
% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts. |
3556 |
% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after |
% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after |
3557 |
% the label; that gets put in in \shortchapentry above.) |
% the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.) |
3558 |
\advance\dimen0 by 1.1em |
\advance\dimen0 by 1.1em |
3559 |
\hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}% |
\hbox to \dimen0{#1\hfil}% |
3560 |
} |
} |
3575 |
\dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}} |
\dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}} |
3576 |
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}} |
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#2}} |
3577 |
|
|
|
|
|
3578 |
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. |
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels. |
3579 |
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc |
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc |
3580 |
|
|
3581 |
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the |
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the |
3582 |
% page number. |
% page number. |
3583 |
% |
% |
3584 |
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we would want to be at chapters |
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters |
3585 |
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. |
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty. |
3586 |
\def\dochapentry#1#2{% |
\def\dochapentry#1#2{% |
3587 |
\penalty-300 \vskip\baselineskip |
\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip |
3588 |
\begingroup |
\begingroup |
3589 |
\chapentryfonts |
\chapentryfonts |
3590 |
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno{#2}}% |
3591 |
\endgroup |
\endgroup |
3592 |
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip |
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip |
3593 |
} |
} |
3594 |
|
|
3595 |
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup |
3611 |
% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We |
% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We |
3612 |
% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist |
% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist |
3613 |
% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) |
% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.) |
|
% |
|
3614 |
\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup |
\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup |
3615 |
\hyphenpenalty = 10000 |
\vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks |
3616 |
|
% Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is |
3617 |
|
% typeset in cmr, so characters such as _ would come out wrong; we |
3618 |
|
% have to do the usual translation tricks. |
3619 |
\entry{#1}{#2}% |
\entry{#1}{#2}% |
3620 |
\endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
3621 |
|
|
3640 |
\newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox |
\newbox\pushcharbox \newbox\bullbox |
3641 |
\newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox |
\newbox\equivbox \newbox\errorbox |
3642 |
|
|
|
\let\ptexequiv = \equiv |
|
|
|
|
3643 |
%{\tentt |
%{\tentt |
3644 |
%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil} |
%\global\setbox\dblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil} |
3645 |
%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil} |
%\global\setbox\longdblarrowbox = \hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil} |
3650 |
% depth .1ex\hfil} |
% depth .1ex\hfil} |
3651 |
%} |
%} |
3652 |
|
|
3653 |
|
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}. |
3654 |
\def\point{$\star$} |
\def\point{$\star$} |
|
|
|
3655 |
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} |
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}} |
3656 |
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} |
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}} |
3657 |
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} |
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}} |
|
|
|
3658 |
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} |
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}} |
3659 |
|
|
3660 |
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit. |
3682 |
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. |
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character. |
3683 |
|
|
3684 |
\def\tex{\begingroup |
\def\tex{\begingroup |
3685 |
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
3686 |
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 |
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6 |
3687 |
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie |
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie |
3688 |
\catcode `\%=14 |
\catcode `\%=14 |
3689 |
\catcode 43=12 |
\catcode 43=12 % plus |
3690 |
\catcode`\"=12 |
\catcode`\"=12 |
3691 |
\catcode`\==12 |
\catcode`\==12 |
3692 |
\catcode`\|=12 |
\catcode`\|=12 |
3693 |
\catcode`\<=12 |
\catcode`\<=12 |
3694 |
\catcode`\>=12 |
\catcode`\>=12 |
3695 |
\escapechar=`\\ |
\escapechar=`\\ |
3696 |
% |
% |
3697 |
\let\~=\ptextilde |
\let\b=\ptexb |
3698 |
\let\{=\ptexlbrace |
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet |
3699 |
\let\}=\ptexrbrace |
\let\c=\ptexc |
3700 |
\let\.=\ptexdot |
\let\,=\ptexcomma |
3701 |
\let\*=\ptexstar |
\let\.=\ptexdot |
3702 |
\let\dots=\ptexdots |
\let\dots=\ptexdots |
3703 |
\def\@{@}% |
\let\equiv=\ptexequiv |
3704 |
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet |
\let\!=\ptexexclam |
3705 |
\let\b=\ptexb \let\c=\ptexc \let\i=\ptexi \let\t=\ptext \let\l=\ptexl |
\let\i=\ptexi |
3706 |
\let\L=\ptexL |
\let\{=\ptexlbrace |
3707 |
% |
\let\+=\tabalign |
3708 |
|
\let\}=\ptexrbrace |
3709 |
|
\let\*=\ptexstar |
3710 |
|
\let\t=\ptext |
3711 |
|
% |
3712 |
|
\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}% |
3713 |
|
\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}% |
3714 |
|
\def\@{@}% |
3715 |
\let\Etex=\endgroup} |
\let\Etex=\endgroup} |
3716 |
|
|
3717 |
% Define @lisp ... @endlisp. |
% Define @lisp ... @endlisp. |
3756 |
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. |
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins. |
3757 |
\let\nonarrowing=\relax |
\let\nonarrowing=\relax |
3758 |
|
|
3759 |
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% |
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around |
3760 |
% \cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around argument |
% environment contents. |
3761 |
\font\circle=lcircle10 |
\font\circle=lcircle10 |
3762 |
\newdimen\circthick |
\newdimen\circthick |
3763 |
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner |
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner |
3769 |
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} |
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}} |
3770 |
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} |
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}} |
3771 |
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
3772 |
\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr |
\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr |
3773 |
\hskip\rskip}} |
\hskip\rskip}} |
3774 |
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip |
3775 |
\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr |
\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr |
3776 |
\hskip\rskip}} |
\hskip\rskip}} |
3777 |
% |
% |
3778 |
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip |
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip |
3779 |
|
|
3780 |
\long\def\cartouche{% |
\long\def\cartouche{% |
3781 |
\begingroup |
\begingroup |
3782 |
\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip |
\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip |
3783 |
\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*. |
\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*. |
3784 |
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip |
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip |
3785 |
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip |
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip |
3786 |
\cartouter=\hsize |
\cartouter=\hsize |
3787 |
\advance\cartouter by 18pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either |
\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either |
3788 |
% side, and for 6pt waste from |
% side, and for 6pt waste from |
3789 |
% each corner char |
% each corner char, and rule thickness |
3790 |
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip |
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip |
3791 |
% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. |
% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin. |
3792 |
\let\nonarrowing=\comment |
\let\nonarrowing=\comment |
3793 |
\vbox\bgroup |
\vbox\bgroup |
3794 |
\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt |
\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt |
3795 |
\carttop |
\carttop |
3796 |
\hbox\bgroup |
\hbox\bgroup |
3797 |
\hskip\lskip |
\hskip\lskip |
3798 |
\vrule\kern3pt |
\vrule\kern3pt |
3799 |
\vbox\bgroup |
\vbox\bgroup |
3800 |
\hsize=\cartinner |
\hsize=\cartinner |
3801 |
\kern3pt |
\kern3pt |
3802 |
\begingroup |
\begingroup |
3803 |
\baselineskip=\normbskip |
\baselineskip=\normbskip |
3804 |
\lineskip=\normlskip |
\lineskip=\normlskip |
3805 |
\parskip=\normpskip |
\parskip=\normpskip |
3806 |
\vskip -\parskip |
\vskip -\parskip |
3807 |
\def\Ecartouche{% |
\def\Ecartouche{% |
3808 |
\endgroup |
\endgroup |
3809 |
\kern3pt |
\kern3pt |
3810 |
\egroup |
\egroup |
3811 |
\kern3pt\vrule |
\kern3pt\vrule |
3812 |
\hskip\rskip |
\hskip\rskip |
3813 |
\egroup |
\egroup |
3814 |
\cartbot |
\cartbot |
3815 |
\egroup |
\egroup |
3816 |
\endgroup |
\endgroup |
3817 |
}} |
}} |
3818 |
|
|
3840 |
\fi |
\fi |
3841 |
} |
} |
3842 |
|
|
3843 |
% To ending an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph |
% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular |
3844 |
% (via \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we |
% environment, so the error checking in \end will work. |
3845 |
% keep the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue |
% |
3846 |
% will be inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the |
% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via |
3847 |
% document, after the environment. |
% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep |
3848 |
|
% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be |
3849 |
|
% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after |
3850 |
|
% the environment. |
3851 |
% |
% |
3852 |
\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}% |
\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup} |
3853 |
|
|
3854 |
% This macro is |
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font. |
3855 |
\def\lisp{\begingroup |
\def\lisp{\begingroup |
3856 |
\nonfillstart |
\nonfillstart |
3857 |
\let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish |
\let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish |
3858 |
\tt |
\tt |
3859 |
\rawbackslash % have \ input char produce \ char from current font |
\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special. |
3860 |
\gobble |
\gobble % eat return |
3861 |
} |
} |
3862 |
|
|
3863 |
% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the |
% @example: Same as @lisp. |
|
% environment, so the error checking in \end will work. |
|
|
% |
|
|
% We must call \lisp last in the definition, since it reads the |
|
|
% return following the @example (or whatever) command. |
|
|
% |
|
3864 |
\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
|
\def\smallexample{\begingroup \def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
|
|
\def\smalllisp{\begingroup \def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
|
3865 |
|
|
3866 |
% @smallexample and @smalllisp. This is not used unless the @smallbook |
% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook |
3867 |
% command is given. Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. |
% redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the |
3868 |
|
% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or |
3869 |
|
% whatever) command. |
3870 |
|
% |
3871 |
|
% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an |
3872 |
|
% @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway. |
3873 |
% |
% |
3874 |
|
\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display} |
3875 |
|
\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
3876 |
|
\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} |
3877 |
|
\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp} |
3878 |
|
|
3879 |
|
% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts. |
3880 |
|
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox. |
3881 |
\def\smalllispx{\begingroup |
\def\smalllispx{\begingroup |
3882 |
\nonfillstart |
\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% |
3883 |
\let\Esmalllisp = \nonfillfinish |
\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% |
3884 |
\let\Esmallexample = \nonfillfinish |
\indexfonts |
3885 |
% |
\lisp |
|
% Smaller interline space and fonts for small examples. |
|
|
\setleading{10pt}% |
|
|
\indexfonts \tt |
|
|
\rawbackslash % make \ output the \ character from the current font (tt) |
|
|
\gobble |
|
3886 |
} |
} |
3887 |
|
|
3888 |
% This is @display; same as @lisp except use roman font. |
% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font. |
3889 |
% |
% |
3890 |
\def\display{\begingroup |
\def\display{\begingroup |
3891 |
\nonfillstart |
\nonfillstart |
3893 |
\gobble |
\gobble |
3894 |
} |
} |
3895 |
|
|
3896 |
% This is @format; same as @display except don't narrow margins. |
% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts. |
3897 |
|
% |
3898 |
|
\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup |
3899 |
|
\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% |
3900 |
|
\indexfonts \rm |
3901 |
|
\display |
3902 |
|
} |
3903 |
|
|
3904 |
|
% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins. |
3905 |
% |
% |
3906 |
\def\format{\begingroup |
\def\format{\begingroup |
3907 |
\let\nonarrowing = t |
\let\nonarrowing = t |
3910 |
\gobble |
\gobble |
3911 |
} |
} |
3912 |
|
|
3913 |
% @flushleft (same as @format) and @flushright. |
% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts. |
3914 |
% |
% |
3915 |
\def\flushleft{\begingroup |
\def\smallformatx{\begingroup |
3916 |
\let\nonarrowing = t |
\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}% |
3917 |
\nonfillstart |
\indexfonts \rm |
3918 |
\let\Eflushleft = \nonfillfinish |
\format |
|
\gobble |
|
3919 |
} |
} |
3920 |
|
|
3921 |
|
% @flushleft (same as @format). |
3922 |
|
% |
3923 |
|
\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format} |
3924 |
|
|
3925 |
|
% @flushright. |
3926 |
|
% |
3927 |
\def\flushright{\begingroup |
\def\flushright{\begingroup |
3928 |
\let\nonarrowing = t |
\let\nonarrowing = t |
3929 |
\nonfillstart |
\nonfillstart |
3930 |
\let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish |
\let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish |
3931 |
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill |
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill |
3932 |
\gobble} |
\gobble |
3933 |
|
} |
3934 |
|
|
3935 |
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) |
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart) |
3936 |
% and narrows the margins. |
% and narrows the margins. |
3953 |
\fi |
\fi |
3954 |
} |
} |
3955 |
|
|
3956 |
|
|
3957 |
\message{defuns,} |
\message{defuns,} |
3958 |
% Define formatter for defuns |
% Define formatter for defuns |
3959 |
% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally |
% First, allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally |
3984 |
|
|
3985 |
\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 } |
\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 } |
3986 |
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} |
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb} |
3987 |
|
% This is used to turn on special parens |
3988 |
|
% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active). |
3989 |
|
\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr} |
3990 |
|
|
3991 |
% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. |
% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions. |
3992 |
% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. |
% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses. |
3993 |
\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested % |
\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested |
3994 |
\global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
\global\advance\parencount by 1 |
3995 |
|
} |
3996 |
% |
% |
3997 |
% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. |
% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens. |
3998 |
\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
3999 |
% |
% |
4000 |
\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. |
\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0. |
4001 |
% also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. |
% also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (. |
4002 |
\ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi |
\ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi |
4003 |
\global\advance \parencount by -1 } |
\global\advance \parencount by -1 } |
4004 |
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards |
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards |
4005 |
\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } |
\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ } |
4006 |
% |
% |
4008 |
} % End of definition inside \activeparens |
} % End of definition inside \activeparens |
4009 |
%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the |
%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the |
4010 |
%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] |
%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] |
4011 |
\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}} \def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}} \def\ampnr{\&} |
\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 } |
4012 |
\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} \def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} |
\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 } |
4013 |
|
\def\ampnr{\&} |
4014 |
|
\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}} |
4015 |
|
\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}} |
4016 |
|
|
4017 |
% First, defname, which formats the header line itself. |
% First, defname, which formats the header line itself. |
4018 |
% #1 should be the function name. |
% #1 should be the function name. |
4023 |
% outside the @def... |
% outside the @def... |
4024 |
\dimen2=\leftskip |
\dimen2=\leftskip |
4025 |
\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent |
\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent |
4026 |
\dimen3=\rightskip |
\noindent |
|
\advance\dimen3 by -\defbodyindent |
|
|
\noindent % |
|
4027 |
\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% |
\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}% |
4028 |
\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line |
\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line |
4029 |
\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations |
\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations |
4030 |
\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 % |
\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1 |
4031 |
% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) |
% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such) |
4032 |
% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, |
% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin, |
4033 |
% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking |
% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking |
4034 |
{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, |
{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins, |
4035 |
% so that \rightline will obey them. |
% so that \rightline will obey them. |
4036 |
\advance \hsize by -\dimen2 \advance \hsize by -\dimen3 |
\advance \hsize by -\dimen2 |
4037 |
\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}}}% |
\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}% |
4038 |
% Make all lines underfull and no complaints: |
% Make all lines underfull and no complaints: |
4039 |
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 |
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000 |
4040 |
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent |
4055 |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
4056 |
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% |
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}% |
4057 |
\parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
4058 |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
4059 |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
4060 |
\begingroup % |
\begingroup % |
4061 |
\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' |
\catcode 61=\active % 61 is `=' |
4062 |
\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} |
\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3} |
4063 |
|
|
4064 |
\def\defmethparsebody #1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % |
% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). |
4065 |
|
% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). |
4066 |
|
% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. |
4067 |
|
% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name. |
4068 |
|
% |
4069 |
|
\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {\begingroup\inENV % |
4070 |
\medbreak % |
\medbreak % |
4071 |
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
4072 |
% so that it will exit this group. |
% so that it will exit this group. |
4073 |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
4074 |
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
4075 |
\parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
4076 |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
4077 |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
4078 |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}}} |
4079 |
|
|
4080 |
|
% @deftypemethod has an extra argument that nothing else does. Sigh. |
4081 |
|
% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define). |
4082 |
|
% #2 is the \...x control sequence for consecutive fns (which we define). |
4083 |
|
% #3 is the control sequence to call to resume processing. |
4084 |
|
% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name. |
4085 |
|
% #5 is the method's return type. |
4086 |
|
% |
4087 |
|
\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
4088 |
|
\medbreak % |
4089 |
|
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
4090 |
|
% so that it will exit this group. |
4091 |
|
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
4092 |
|
\def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}% |
4093 |
|
\parindent=0in |
4094 |
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
4095 |
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
4096 |
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}} |
4097 |
|
|
4098 |
\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
4099 |
\medbreak % |
\medbreak % |
4100 |
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
% Define the end token that this defining construct specifies |
4103 |
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
4104 |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
4105 |
\parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
4106 |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
4107 |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
4108 |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
4109 |
|
|
4118 |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
4119 |
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% |
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}% |
4120 |
\parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
4121 |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
4122 |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
4123 |
\begingroup % |
\begingroup % |
4124 |
\catcode 61=\active % |
\catcode 61=\active % |
4126 |
|
|
4127 |
% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for |
% This is used for \def{tp,vr}parsebody. It could probably be used for |
4128 |
% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. |
% some of the others, too, with some judicious conditionals. |
4129 |
% |
% |
4130 |
\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% |
\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{% |
4131 |
\begingroup\inENV % |
\begingroup\inENV % |
4132 |
\medbreak % |
\medbreak % |
4135 |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}% |
4136 |
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}% |
4137 |
\parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
4138 |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
4139 |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
4140 |
\begingroup\obeylines |
\begingroup\obeylines |
4141 |
} |
} |
4160 |
} |
} |
4161 |
|
|
4162 |
% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the |
% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the |
4163 |
% braces (if any). That's what this does, putting the result in \tptemp. |
% braces (if any). That's what this does. |
4164 |
% |
% |
4165 |
\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{\def\tptemp{#1}}% |
\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1} |
4166 |
|
|
4167 |
% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final |
% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final |
4168 |
% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 |
% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3 |
4169 |
% (which might be empty) the arguments. |
% (which might be empty) the arguments. |
4170 |
% |
% |
4171 |
\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% |
\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{% |
4172 |
\removeemptybraces#2\relax |
#1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}% |
|
#1{\tptemp}{#3}% |
|
4173 |
}% |
}% |
4174 |
|
|
4175 |
\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {\begingroup\inENV % |
4180 |
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}% |
4181 |
\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}% |
4182 |
\parindent=0in |
\parindent=0in |
4183 |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent \advance \rightskip by \defbodyindent |
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent |
4184 |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent |
4185 |
\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{#5}}} |
4186 |
|
|
4210 |
\hyphenchar\tensl=0 |
\hyphenchar\tensl=0 |
4211 |
#1% |
#1% |
4212 |
\hyphenchar\tensl=45 |
\hyphenchar\tensl=45 |
4213 |
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{unbalanced parens in @def arguments}\fi% |
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi% |
4214 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
4215 |
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
4216 |
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak |
4217 |
} |
} |
4218 |
|
|
4219 |
\def\deftypefunargs #1{% |
\def\deftypefunargs #1{% |
4220 |
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. |
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars. |
4221 |
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. |
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar. |
4222 |
\functionparens |
% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special. |
4223 |
|
\boldbraxnoamp |
4224 |
\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars |
\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars |
4225 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
4226 |
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil |
4227 |
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000% |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak |
4228 |
} |
} |
4229 |
|
|
4230 |
% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. |
% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed. |
4311 |
\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} |
\def\defmacx #1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}} |
4312 |
\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} |
\def\defspecx #1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}} |
4313 |
\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} |
\def\deftypefnx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}} |
4314 |
\def\deftypeunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypeunx in invalid context}} |
\def\deftypemethodx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}} |
4315 |
|
\def\deftypefunx #1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}} |
4316 |
|
|
4317 |
% @defmethod, and so on |
% @defmethod, and so on |
4318 |
|
|
4319 |
% @defop {Funny Method} foo-class frobnicate argument |
% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG... |
4320 |
|
|
4321 |
\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% |
\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}% |
4322 |
\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} |
\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype} |
4323 |
|
|
4324 |
\def\defopheader #1#2#3{% |
\def\defopheader #1#2#3{% |
4325 |
\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% Make entry in function index |
\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index |
4326 |
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}% |
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype{} on #1}% |
4327 |
\defunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
\defunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
4328 |
} |
} |
4329 |
|
|
4330 |
% @defmethod == @defop Method |
% @deftypemethod CLASS RETURN-TYPE METHOD ARG... |
4331 |
|
% |
4332 |
|
\def\deftypemethod{% |
4333 |
|
\deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader} |
4334 |
|
% |
4335 |
|
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args. |
4336 |
|
\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{% |
4337 |
|
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index |
4338 |
|
\begingroup |
4339 |
|
\defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% |
4340 |
|
\deftypefunargs{#4}% |
4341 |
|
\endgroup |
4342 |
|
} |
4343 |
|
|
4344 |
|
% @defmethod == @defop Method |
4345 |
|
% |
4346 |
\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} |
\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader} |
4347 |
|
% |
4348 |
\def\defmethodheader #1#2#3{% |
% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args. |
4349 |
\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{on #1}% entry in function index |
\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{% |
4350 |
\begingroup\defname {#2}{Method on #1}% |
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index |
4351 |
\defunargs {#3}\endgroup % |
\begingroup |
4352 |
|
\defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}% |
4353 |
|
\defunargs{#3}% |
4354 |
|
\endgroup |
4355 |
} |
} |
4356 |
|
|
4357 |
% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag |
% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag |
4390 |
% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up |
% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up |
4391 |
\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% |
\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1% |
4392 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
4393 |
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000} |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak} |
4394 |
|
|
4395 |
% @defvr Counter foo-count |
% @defvr Counter foo-count |
4396 |
|
|
4421 |
|
|
4422 |
\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} |
\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader} |
4423 |
|
|
4424 |
% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name. |
% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that |
4425 |
|
% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index. |
4426 |
\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% |
\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{% |
4427 |
\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in variables index |
\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index |
4428 |
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}% |
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$$$#2}{Variable}% |
4429 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
4430 |
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak |
4431 |
\endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
4432 |
|
\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}} |
4433 |
|
|
4434 |
% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable |
% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable |
4435 |
|
|
4436 |
\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} |
\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader} |
4437 |
|
|
4438 |
\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#3}}% |
\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax% |
4439 |
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} |
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$$$#3}{#1} |
4440 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
\interlinepenalty=10000 |
4441 |
\endgraf\penalty 10000\vskip -\parskip\penalty 10000 |
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak |
4442 |
\endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
4443 |
|
|
4444 |
% This definition is run if you use @defvarx |
% This definition is run if you use @defvarx |
4467 |
|
|
4468 |
\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} |
\def\deftpx #1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}} |
4469 |
|
|
|
\message{cross reference,} |
|
|
% Define cross-reference macros |
|
|
\newwrite \auxfile |
|
4470 |
|
|
4471 |
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. |
\message{macros,} |
4472 |
|
% @macro. |
4473 |
|
|
4474 |
|
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens, |
4475 |
|
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX. |
4476 |
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined |
4477 |
|
\newwrite\macscribble |
4478 |
|
\def\scanmacro#1{% |
4479 |
|
\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M |
4480 |
|
\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp |
4481 |
|
\immediate\write\macscribble{#1}% |
4482 |
|
\immediate\closeout\macscribble |
4483 |
|
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces |
4484 |
|
\input \jobname.tmp |
4485 |
|
\endgroup |
4486 |
|
} |
4487 |
|
\else |
4488 |
|
\def\scanmacro#1{% |
4489 |
|
\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M |
4490 |
|
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1}\endgroup} |
4491 |
|
\fi |
4492 |
|
|
4493 |
|
\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters |
4494 |
|
\newtoks\macname % Macro name |
4495 |
|
\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive? |
4496 |
|
|
4497 |
|
% Utility routines. |
4498 |
|
% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames. |
4499 |
|
\def\cslet#1#2{% |
4500 |
|
\expandafter\expandafter |
4501 |
|
\expandafter\let |
4502 |
|
\expandafter\expandafter |
4503 |
|
\csname#1\endcsname |
4504 |
|
\csname#2\endcsname} |
4505 |
|
|
4506 |
|
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string. |
4507 |
|
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN). |
4508 |
|
{\catcode`\@=11 |
4509 |
|
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }} |
4510 |
|
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@} |
4511 |
|
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @} |
4512 |
|
\def\unbrace#1{#1} |
4513 |
|
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1} |
4514 |
|
} |
4515 |
|
|
4516 |
|
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string. |
4517 |
|
{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3% |
4518 |
|
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}% |
4519 |
|
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}% |
4520 |
|
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}% |
4521 |
|
} |
4522 |
|
|
4523 |
|
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where |
4524 |
|
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active |
4525 |
|
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \. |
4526 |
|
|
4527 |
|
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is |
4528 |
|
% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro |
4529 |
|
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro. |
4530 |
|
|
4531 |
|
\def\macrobodyctxt{% |
4532 |
|
\catcode`\~=12 |
4533 |
|
\catcode`\^=12 |
4534 |
|
\catcode`\_=12 |
4535 |
|
\catcode`\|=12 |
4536 |
|
\catcode`\<=12 |
4537 |
|
\catcode`\>=12 |
4538 |
|
\catcode`\+=12 |
4539 |
|
\catcode`\{=12 |
4540 |
|
\catcode`\}=12 |
4541 |
|
\catcode`\@=12 |
4542 |
|
\catcode`\^^M=12 |
4543 |
|
\usembodybackslash} |
4544 |
|
|
4545 |
|
\def\macroargctxt{% |
4546 |
|
\catcode`\~=12 |
4547 |
|
\catcode`\^=12 |
4548 |
|
\catcode`\_=12 |
4549 |
|
\catcode`\|=12 |
4550 |
|
\catcode`\<=12 |
4551 |
|
\catcode`\>=12 |
4552 |
|
\catcode`\+=12 |
4553 |
|
\catcode`\@=12 |
4554 |
|
\catcode`\\=12} |
4555 |
|
|
4556 |
|
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies. |
4557 |
|
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N |
4558 |
|
% where N is the macro parameter number. |
4559 |
|
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so |
4560 |
|
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash. |
4561 |
|
|
4562 |
|
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active |
4563 |
|
@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash} |
4564 |
|
@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname} |
4565 |
|
} |
4566 |
|
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash} |
4567 |
|
|
4568 |
|
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx} |
4569 |
|
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx} |
4570 |
|
|
4571 |
|
\def\macroxxx#1{% |
4572 |
|
\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist |
4573 |
|
\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments |
4574 |
|
\paramno=0% |
4575 |
|
\else |
4576 |
|
\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;% |
4577 |
|
\fi |
4578 |
|
\expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax |
4579 |
|
\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}% |
4580 |
|
\else |
4581 |
|
\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}% |
4582 |
|
\fi |
4583 |
|
\begingroup \macrobodyctxt |
4584 |
|
\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody |
4585 |
|
\else \expandafter\parsemacbody |
4586 |
|
\fi} |
4587 |
|
|
4588 |
|
\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx} |
4589 |
|
\def\unmacroxxx#1{% |
4590 |
|
\expandafter\ifx \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \relax |
4591 |
|
\errmessage{Macro \the\macname\ not defined.}% |
4592 |
|
\else |
4593 |
|
\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}% |
4594 |
|
\expandafter\let \csname macsave.\the\macname\endcsname \undefined |
4595 |
|
\fi |
4596 |
|
} |
4597 |
|
|
4598 |
|
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a |
4599 |
|
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by |
4600 |
|
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed. |
4601 |
|
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}} |
4602 |
|
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs} |
4603 |
|
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}} |
4604 |
|
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}} |
4605 |
|
|
4606 |
|
% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist |
4607 |
|
% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah |
4608 |
|
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list. |
4609 |
|
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above). |
4610 |
|
|
4611 |
|
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions. |
4612 |
|
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something |
4613 |
|
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine |
4614 |
|
% it to # just before using the token list produced. |
4615 |
|
% |
4616 |
|
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before |
4617 |
|
% the macro is used. |
4618 |
|
|
4619 |
|
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}% |
4620 |
|
\let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,} |
4621 |
|
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{% |
4622 |
|
\if#1;\let\next=\relax |
4623 |
|
\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx |
4624 |
|
\advance\paramno by 1% |
4625 |
|
\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname |
4626 |
|
{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}% |
4627 |
|
\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}% |
4628 |
|
\fi\next} |
4629 |
|
|
4630 |
|
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. |
4631 |
|
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.) |
4632 |
|
|
4633 |
|
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro% |
4634 |
|
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% |
4635 |
|
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro% |
4636 |
|
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}% |
4637 |
|
|
4638 |
|
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and |
4639 |
|
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments. |
4640 |
|
% Much magic with \expandafter here. |
4641 |
|
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file |
4642 |
|
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group. |
4643 |
|
\def\defmacro{% |
4644 |
|
\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars |
4645 |
|
\ifrecursive |
4646 |
|
\ifcase\paramno |
4647 |
|
% 0 |
4648 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
4649 |
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
4650 |
|
\or % 1 |
4651 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
4652 |
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
4653 |
|
\noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% |
4654 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% |
4655 |
|
\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
4656 |
|
\else % many |
4657 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
4658 |
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
4659 |
|
\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname} |
4660 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% |
4661 |
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% |
4662 |
|
\expandafter\expandafter |
4663 |
|
\expandafter\xdef |
4664 |
|
\expandafter\expandafter |
4665 |
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname |
4666 |
|
\paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}% |
4667 |
|
\fi |
4668 |
|
\else |
4669 |
|
\ifcase\paramno |
4670 |
|
% 0 |
4671 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
4672 |
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
4673 |
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
4674 |
|
\or % 1 |
4675 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
4676 |
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
4677 |
|
\noexpand\braceorline\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}% |
4678 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{% |
4679 |
|
\egroup |
4680 |
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
4681 |
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
4682 |
|
\else % many |
4683 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{% |
4684 |
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt |
4685 |
|
\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname} |
4686 |
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{% |
4687 |
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}% |
4688 |
|
\expandafter\expandafter |
4689 |
|
\expandafter\xdef |
4690 |
|
\expandafter\expandafter |
4691 |
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname |
4692 |
|
\paramlist{% |
4693 |
|
\egroup |
4694 |
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}% |
4695 |
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}% |
4696 |
|
\fi |
4697 |
|
\fi} |
4698 |
|
|
4699 |
|
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}} |
4700 |
|
|
4701 |
|
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a |
4702 |
|
% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole |
4703 |
|
% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence |
4704 |
|
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg) |
4705 |
|
\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx} |
4706 |
|
\def\braceorlinexxx{% |
4707 |
|
\ifx\nchar\bgroup\else |
4708 |
|
\expandafter\parsearg |
4709 |
|
\fi \next} |
4710 |
|
|
4711 |
|
|
4712 |
|
\message{cross references,} |
4713 |
|
\newwrite\auxfile |
4714 |
|
|
4715 |
|
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known. |
4716 |
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. |
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known. |
4717 |
|
|
4718 |
% \setref{foo} defines a cross-reference point named foo. |
% @inforef is relatively simple. |
4719 |
|
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**} |
4720 |
|
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}}, |
4721 |
|
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}} |
4722 |
|
|
4723 |
|
% @node's job is to define \lastnode. |
4724 |
|
\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz} |
4725 |
|
\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]} |
4726 |
|
\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}} |
4727 |
|
\let\nwnode=\node |
4728 |
|
\let\lastnode=\relax |
4729 |
|
|
4730 |
\def\setref#1{% |
% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these. |
4731 |
\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
\def\donoderef{% |
4732 |
\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
4733 |
\dosetq{#1-snt}{Ysectionnumberandtype}} |
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% |
4734 |
|
{Ysectionnumberandtype}% |
4735 |
\def\unnumbsetref#1{% |
\global\let\lastnode=\relax |
4736 |
\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
\fi |
4737 |
\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
} |
4738 |
\dosetq{#1-snt}{Ynothing}} |
\def\unnumbnoderef{% |
4739 |
|
\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
4740 |
\def\appendixsetref#1{% |
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}% |
4741 |
\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
\global\let\lastnode=\relax |
4742 |
\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
\fi |
4743 |
\dosetq{#1-snt}{Yappendixletterandtype}} |
} |
4744 |
|
\def\appendixnoderef{% |
4745 |
% \xref, \pxref, and \ref generate cross-references to specified points. |
\ifx\lastnode\relax\else |
4746 |
% For \xrefX, #1 is the node name, #2 the name of the Info |
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}% |
4747 |
% cross-reference, #3 the printed node name, #4 the name of the Info |
{Yappendixletterandtype}% |
4748 |
% file, #5 the name of the printed manual. All but the node name can be |
\global\let\lastnode=\relax |
4749 |
% omitted. |
\fi |
4750 |
|
} |
4751 |
|
|
4752 |
|
|
4753 |
|
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point. |
4754 |
|
% |
4755 |
|
\def\anchor#1{\setref{#1}{Ynothing}} |
4756 |
|
|
4757 |
|
|
4758 |
|
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely |
4759 |
|
% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have |
4760 |
|
% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title |
4761 |
|
% aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the |
4762 |
|
% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do. |
4763 |
|
% |
4764 |
|
\def\setref#1#2{{% |
4765 |
|
\indexdummies |
4766 |
|
\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}% |
4767 |
|
\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}% |
4768 |
|
\dosetq{#1-snt}{#2} |
4769 |
|
}} |
4770 |
|
|
4771 |
|
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is |
4772 |
|
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed |
4773 |
|
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed |
4774 |
|
% manual. All but the node name can be omitted. |
4775 |
% |
% |
4776 |
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
4777 |
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]} |
4783 |
\setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}% |
\setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}% |
4784 |
\ifdim \wd0 = 0pt |
\ifdim \wd0 = 0pt |
4785 |
% No printed node name was explicitly given. |
% No printed node name was explicitly given. |
4786 |
\ifx\SETxref-automatic-section-title\relax % |
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax |
4787 |
|
% Use the node name inside the square brackets. |
4788 |
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
4789 |
|
\else |
4790 |
% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside |
% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside |
4791 |
% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. |
% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it. |
4792 |
\ifdim \wd1>0pt% |
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt |
4793 |
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it. |
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it. |
4794 |
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
4795 |
\else |
\else |
4796 |
\ifhavexrefs |
\ifhavexrefs |
4797 |
% We know the real title if we have the xref values. |
% We know the real title if we have the xref values. |
4798 |
\def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}}% |
\def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}% |
4799 |
\else |
\else |
4800 |
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name. |
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name. |
4801 |
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
4802 |
\fi% |
\fi% |
4803 |
\fi |
\fi |
|
\def\printednodename{#1-title}% |
|
|
\else |
|
|
% Use the node name inside the square brackets. |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}% |
|
4804 |
\fi |
\fi |
4805 |
\fi |
\fi |
4806 |
% |
% |
4818 |
% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of |
% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of |
4819 |
% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the |
% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the |
4820 |
% printing, back off for the \refx-pg. |
% printing, back off for the \refx-pg. |
4821 |
{\turnoffactive \refx{#1-snt}{}}% |
{\normalturnoffactive |
4822 |
\space [\printednodename],\space |
% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for |
4823 |
|
% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be. |
4824 |
|
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}% |
4825 |
|
\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi |
4826 |
|
}% |
4827 |
|
% [mynode], |
4828 |
|
[\printednodename],\space |
4829 |
|
% page 3 |
4830 |
\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% |
\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}% |
4831 |
\fi |
\fi |
4832 |
\endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
4833 |
|
|
4834 |
% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros |
% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros |
4835 |
|
|
4836 |
% Use \turnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore |
% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore |
4837 |
% work in node names. |
% and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.) |
4838 |
\def\dosetq #1#2{{\let\folio=0 \turnoffactive \auxhat% |
\def\dosetq#1#2{% |
4839 |
\edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq {#1}{#2}}}% |
{\let\folio=0 |
4840 |
\next}} |
\normalturnoffactive |
4841 |
|
\edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}% |
4842 |
|
\iflinks |
4843 |
|
\next |
4844 |
|
\fi |
4845 |
|
}% |
4846 |
|
} |
4847 |
|
|
4848 |
% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into |
% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into |
4849 |
% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} |
% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...} |
4894 |
\def\refx#1#2{% |
\def\refx#1#2{% |
4895 |
\expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax |
\expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax |
4896 |
% If not defined, say something at least. |
% If not defined, say something at least. |
4897 |
$\langle$un\-de\-fined$\rangle$% |
\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright |
4898 |
\ifhavexrefs |
\iflinks |
4899 |
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% |
\ifhavexrefs |
4900 |
\else |
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}% |
4901 |
\ifwarnedxrefs\else |
\else |
4902 |
\global\warnedxrefstrue |
\ifwarnedxrefs\else |
4903 |
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% |
\global\warnedxrefstrue |
4904 |
|
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}% |
4905 |
|
\fi |
4906 |
\fi |
\fi |
4907 |
\fi |
\fi |
4908 |
\else |
\else |
4912 |
#2% Output the suffix in any case. |
#2% Output the suffix in any case. |
4913 |
} |
} |
4914 |
|
|
|
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. |
|
|
|
|
4915 |
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. |
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. |
4916 |
\def\xrdef #1#2{ |
% |
4917 |
{\catcode`\'=\other\expandafter \gdef \csname X#1\endcsname {#2}}} |
\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup |
4918 |
|
% Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument. |
4919 |
|
\catcode`\\ = 0 |
4920 |
|
\afterassignment\endgroup |
4921 |
|
\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname |
4922 |
|
} |
4923 |
|
|
4924 |
\def\readauxfile{% |
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists. |
4925 |
\begingroup |
\def\readauxfile{\begingroup |
4926 |
\catcode `\^^@=\other |
\catcode`\^^@=\other |
4927 |
\catcode `\&=\other |
\catcode`\^^A=\other |
4928 |
\catcode `\\ =\other |
\catcode`\^^B=\other |
4929 |
\catcode `\^^C=\other |
\catcode`\^^C=\other |
4930 |
\catcode `\^^D=\other |
\catcode`\^^D=\other |
4931 |
\catcode `\^^E=\other |
\catcode`\^^E=\other |
4932 |
\catcode `\^^F=\other |
\catcode`\^^F=\other |
4933 |
\catcode `\^^G=\other |
\catcode`\^^G=\other |
4934 |
\catcode `\^^H=\other |
\catcode`\^^H=\other |
4935 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^K=\other |
4936 |
\catcode `\^^L=\other |
\catcode`\^^L=\other |
4937 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^N=\other |
4938 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^P=\other |
4939 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^Q=\other |
4940 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^R=\other |
4941 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^S=\other |
4942 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^T=\other |
4943 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^U=\other |
4944 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^V=\other |
4945 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^W=\other |
4946 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^X=\other |
4947 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^Z=\other |
4948 |
\catcode `\=\other |
\catcode`\^^[=\other |
4949 |
\catcode 26=\other |
\catcode`\^^\=\other |
4950 |
\catcode `\^^[=\other |
\catcode`\^^]=\other |
4951 |
\catcode `\^^\=\other |
\catcode`\^^^=\other |
4952 |
\catcode `\^^]=\other |
\catcode`\^^_=\other |
4953 |
\catcode `\^^^=\other |
\catcode`\@=\other |
4954 |
\catcode `\^^_=\other |
\catcode`\^=\other |
4955 |
\catcode `\@=\other |
% It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc. |
4956 |
\catcode `\^=\other |
% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't |
4957 |
\catcode `\~=\other |
% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore, |
4958 |
\catcode `\[=\other |
% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^ |
4959 |
\catcode `\]=\other |
% character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat |
4960 |
\catcode`\"=\other |
% b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first |
4961 |
\catcode`\_=\other |
% argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could |
4962 |
\catcode`\|=\other |
% all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't. |
4963 |
\catcode`\<=\other |
% |
4964 |
\catcode`\>=\other |
% The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat: |
4965 |
\catcode `\$=\other |
% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter |
4966 |
\catcode `\#=\other |
% and then to call \auxhat in \setq. |
4967 |
\catcode `\&=\other |
% |
4968 |
% `\+ does not work, so use 43. |
\catcode`\~=\other |
4969 |
\catcode 43=\other |
\catcode`\[=\other |
4970 |
% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters |
\catcode`\]=\other |
4971 |
{% |
\catcode`\"=\other |
4972 |
\count 1=128 |
\catcode`\_=\other |
4973 |
\def\loop{% |
\catcode`\|=\other |
4974 |
\catcode\count 1=\other |
\catcode`\<=\other |
4975 |
\advance\count 1 by 1 |
\catcode`\>=\other |
4976 |
\ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi |
\catcode`\$=\other |
4977 |
|
\catcode`\#=\other |
4978 |
|
\catcode`\&=\other |
4979 |
|
\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off |
4980 |
|
% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters |
4981 |
|
{% |
4982 |
|
\count 1=128 |
4983 |
|
\def\loop{% |
4984 |
|
\catcode\count 1=\other |
4985 |
|
\advance\count 1 by 1 |
4986 |
|
\ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi |
4987 |
|
}% |
4988 |
}% |
}% |
4989 |
}% |
% The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now). |
4990 |
% the aux file uses ' as the escape. |
% Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on |
4991 |
% Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on |
% entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. |
4992 |
% entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names. |
% For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ |
4993 |
% For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^ |
% Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, |
4994 |
% Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish, |
% but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. |
4995 |
% but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in. |
\catcode`\{=1 |
4996 |
\catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2 |
\catcode`\}=2 |
4997 |
\catcode `\%=\other |
\catcode`\%=\other |
4998 |
\catcode `\'=0 |
\catcode`\'=0 |
4999 |
\catcode`\^=7 % to make ^^e4 etc usable in xref tags |
\catcode`\\=\other |
5000 |
\catcode `\\=\other |
% |
5001 |
\openin 1 \jobname.aux |
\openin 1 \jobname.aux |
5002 |
\ifeof 1 \else \closein 1 \input \jobname.aux \global\havexrefstrue |
\ifeof 1 \else |
5003 |
\global\warnedobstrue |
\closein 1 |
5004 |
\fi |
\input \jobname.aux |
5005 |
% Open the new aux file. Tex will close it automatically at exit. |
\global\havexrefstrue |
5006 |
\openout \auxfile=\jobname.aux |
\global\warnedobstrue |
5007 |
|
\fi |
5008 |
|
% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit. |
5009 |
|
\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux |
5010 |
\endgroup} |
\endgroup} |
5011 |
|
|
5012 |
|
|
5017 |
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is |
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is |
5018 |
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a |
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a |
5019 |
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is |
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is |
5020 |
% removed. |
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a |
5021 |
|
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.) |
5022 |
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } |
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 } |
5023 |
|
|
5024 |
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.. |
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only. |
5025 |
\let\footnotestyle=\comment |
\let\footnotestyle=\comment |
5026 |
|
|
5027 |
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote |
5047 |
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the |
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the |
5048 |
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. |
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general. |
5049 |
% |
% |
5050 |
\long\gdef\footnotezzz#1{\insert\footins{% |
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses |
5051 |
|
% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when |
5052 |
|
% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96. |
5053 |
|
% |
5054 |
|
\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup |
5055 |
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the |
5056 |
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. |
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment. |
5057 |
% So reset some parameters. |
% So reset some parameters. |
5073 |
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it |
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it |
5074 |
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. |
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote. |
5075 |
\footstrut |
\footstrut |
5076 |
#1\strut}% |
\futurelet\next\fo@t |
5077 |
} |
} |
5078 |
|
\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t |
5079 |
|
\else\let\next\f@t\fi \next} |
5080 |
|
\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next} |
5081 |
|
\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot} |
5082 |
|
\def\@foot{\strut\egroup} |
5083 |
|
|
5084 |
}%end \catcode `\@=11 |
}%end \catcode `\@=11 |
5085 |
|
|
5136 |
% |
% |
5137 |
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} |
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt} |
5138 |
|
|
5139 |
|
% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this. |
5140 |
% End of control word definitions. |
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain. |
5141 |
|
% |
5142 |
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} |
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image |
5143 |
|
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get |
5144 |
\def\openindices{% |
% undone and the next image would fail. |
5145 |
\newindex{cp}% |
\openin 1 = epsf.tex |
5146 |
\newcodeindex{fn}% |
\ifeof 1 \else |
5147 |
\newcodeindex{vr}% |
\closein 1 |
5148 |
\newcodeindex{tp}% |
% Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in |
5149 |
\newcodeindex{ky}% |
% doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan). |
5150 |
\newcodeindex{pg}% |
\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }% |
5151 |
|
\input epsf.tex |
5152 |
|
\fi |
5153 |
|
% |
5154 |
|
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf |
5155 |
|
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to |
5156 |
|
work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get |
5157 |
|
it from ftp://ftp.tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.} |
5158 |
|
% |
5159 |
|
% Only complain once about lack of epsf.tex. |
5160 |
|
\def\image#1{% |
5161 |
|
\ifx\epsfbox\undefined |
5162 |
|
\ifwarnednoepsf \else |
5163 |
|
\errhelp = \noepsfhelp |
5164 |
|
\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}% |
5165 |
|
\global\warnednoepsftrue |
5166 |
|
\fi |
5167 |
|
\else |
5168 |
|
\imagexxx #1,,,\finish |
5169 |
|
\fi |
5170 |
} |
} |
5171 |
|
% |
5172 |
|
% Arguments to @image: |
5173 |
|
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension. |
5174 |
|
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height. |
5175 |
|
% #4 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff. |
5176 |
|
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% |
5177 |
|
% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure. |
5178 |
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi |
5179 |
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi |
5180 |
|
% If the image is by itself, center it. |
5181 |
|
\ifvmode |
5182 |
|
\nobreak\medskip |
5183 |
|
\nobreak |
5184 |
|
\centerline{\epsfbox{#1.eps}}% |
5185 |
|
\bigbreak |
5186 |
|
\else |
5187 |
|
\epsfbox{#1.eps}% |
5188 |
|
\fi |
5189 |
|
} |
5190 |
|
|
5191 |
|
|
5192 |
% Set some numeric style parameters, for 8.5 x 11 format. |
\message{paper sizes,} |
5193 |
|
% And other related parameters. |
5194 |
|
|
|
%\hsize = 6.5in |
|
5195 |
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt |
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt |
5196 |
\parindent = \defaultparindent |
|
5197 |
\parskip 3pt plus2pt minus2pt |
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
5198 |
\setleading{13pt} |
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt |
5199 |
\advance\topskip by 1.2cm |
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt |
5200 |
|
|
5201 |
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. |
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages. |
5202 |
\vbadness=10000 |
\vbadness = 10000 |
5203 |
|
|
5204 |
|
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either. |
5205 |
|
\hbadness = 2000 |
5206 |
|
|
5207 |
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. |
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans. |
5208 |
\widowpenalty=10000 |
\widowpenalty=10000 |
5211 |
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're |
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're |
5212 |
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of |
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of |
5213 |
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on |
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on |
5214 |
% \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format. |
% \hsize. This makes it come to about 9pt for the 8.5x11 format. We |
5215 |
|
% call this whenever the paper size is set. |
5216 |
% |
% |
5217 |
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined |
\def\setemergencystretch{% |
5218 |
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. |
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined |
5219 |
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% |
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway. |
5220 |
\else |
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}% |
5221 |
\emergencystretch = \hsize |
\else |
5222 |
\divide\emergencystretch by 45 |
\emergencystretch = \hsize |
5223 |
\fi |
\divide\emergencystretch by 45 |
5224 |
|
\fi |
5225 |
|
} |
5226 |
|
|
5227 |
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 format (or else 7x9.25) |
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset; |
5228 |
\def\smallbook{ |
% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. Then whoever calls us can |
5229 |
|
% set \parskip and call \setleading for \baselineskip. |
5230 |
|
% |
5231 |
|
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{% |
5232 |
|
\voffset = #3\relax |
5233 |
|
\topskip = #6\relax |
5234 |
|
\splittopskip = \topskip |
5235 |
|
% |
5236 |
|
\vsize = #1\relax |
5237 |
|
\advance\vsize by \topskip |
5238 |
|
\outervsize = \vsize |
5239 |
|
\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin |
5240 |
|
\pageheight = \vsize |
5241 |
|
% |
5242 |
|
\hsize = #2\relax |
5243 |
|
\outerhsize = \hsize |
5244 |
|
\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
5245 |
|
\pagewidth = \hsize |
5246 |
|
% |
5247 |
|
\normaloffset = #4\relax |
5248 |
|
\bindingoffset = #5\relax |
5249 |
|
% |
5250 |
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent |
5251 |
|
\setemergencystretch |
5252 |
|
} |
5253 |
|
|
5254 |
|
% @letterpaper (the default). |
5255 |
|
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
5256 |
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
5257 |
|
\setleading{13.2pt}% |
5258 |
|
% |
5259 |
|
% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even. |
5260 |
|
\internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}% |
5261 |
|
}} |
5262 |
|
|
5263 |
% These values for secheadingskip and subsecheadingskip are |
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format. |
5264 |
% experiments. RJC 7 Aug 1992 |
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1 |
5265 |
\global\secheadingskip = 17pt plus 6pt minus 3pt |
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt |
5266 |
\global\subsecheadingskip = 14pt plus 6pt minus 3pt |
\setleading{12pt}% |
5267 |
|
% |
5268 |
\global\lispnarrowing = 0.3in |
\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}% |
5269 |
\setleading{12pt} |
% |
5270 |
\advance\topskip by -1cm |
\lispnarrowing = 0.3in |
5271 |
\global\parskip 3pt plus 1pt |
\tolerance = 700 |
5272 |
\global\hsize = 5in |
\hfuzz = 1pt |
5273 |
\global\vsize=7.5in |
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt |
5274 |
\global\tolerance=700 |
\deftypemargin = 0pt |
5275 |
\global\hfuzz=1pt |
\defbodyindent = .5cm |
5276 |
\global\contentsrightmargin=0pt |
% |
5277 |
\global\deftypemargin=0pt |
\let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx |
5278 |
\global\defbodyindent=.5cm |
\let\smallexample = \smalllispx |
5279 |
|
\let\smallformat = \smallformatx |
5280 |
\global\pagewidth=\hsize |
\let\smalllisp = \smalllispx |
5281 |
\global\pageheight=\vsize |
}} |
|
|
|
|
\global\let\smalllisp=\smalllispx |
|
|
\global\let\smallexample=\smalllispx |
|
|
\global\def\Esmallexample{\Esmalllisp} |
|
|
} |
|
5282 |
|
|
5283 |
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. |
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper. |
5284 |
\def\afourpaper{ |
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1 |
5285 |
\global\tolerance=700 |
\setleading{12pt}% |
5286 |
\global\hfuzz=1pt |
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
5287 |
\setleading{12pt} |
% |
5288 |
\global\parskip 15pt plus 1pt |
\internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% |
5289 |
|
% |
5290 |
\global\vsize= 53\baselineskip |
\tolerance = 700 |
5291 |
\advance\vsize by \topskip |
\hfuzz = 1pt |
5292 |
%\global\hsize= 5.85in % A4 wide 10pt |
}} |
|
\global\hsize= 6.5in |
|
|
\global\outerhsize=\hsize |
|
|
\global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
|
|
\global\outervsize=\vsize |
|
|
\global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in |
|
|
|
|
|
\global\pagewidth=\hsize |
|
|
\global\pageheight=\vsize |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
% Allow control of the text dimensions. Parameters in order: textheight; |
|
|
% textwidth; \voffset; \hoffset (!); binding offset. All require a dimension; |
|
|
% header is additional; added length extends the bottom of the page. |
|
|
|
|
|
\def\changepagesizes#1#2#3#4#5{ |
|
|
\global\vsize= #1 |
|
|
\advance\vsize by \topskip |
|
|
\global\voffset= #3 |
|
|
\global\hsize= #2 |
|
|
\global\outerhsize=\hsize |
|
|
\global\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in |
|
|
\global\outervsize=\vsize |
|
|
\global\advance\outervsize by 0.6in |
|
|
\global\pagewidth=\hsize |
|
|
\global\pageheight=\vsize |
|
|
\global\normaloffset= #4 |
|
|
\global\bindingoffset= #5} |
|
5293 |
|
|
5294 |
% This layout is compatible with Latex on A4 paper. |
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin |
5295 |
|
% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm. |
5296 |
|
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1 |
5297 |
|
\setleading{13.6pt}% |
5298 |
|
% |
5299 |
|
\afourpaper |
5300 |
|
\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}% |
5301 |
|
% |
5302 |
|
\globaldefs = 0 |
5303 |
|
}} |
5304 |
|
|
5305 |
\def\afourlatex{\changepagesizes{22cm}{15cm}{7mm}{4.6mm}{5mm}} |
% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format. |
5306 |
|
\def\afourwide{% |
5307 |
|
\afourpaper |
5308 |
|
\internalpagesizes{9.5in}{6.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}% |
5309 |
|
% |
5310 |
|
\globaldefs = 0 |
5311 |
|
} |
5312 |
|
|
5313 |
|
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH] |
5314 |
|
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip, |
5315 |
|
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow. |
5316 |
|
% |
5317 |
|
\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx} |
5318 |
|
\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish} |
5319 |
|
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{% |
5320 |
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi |
5321 |
|
\globaldefs = 1 |
5322 |
|
% |
5323 |
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
5324 |
|
\setleading{13.2pt}% |
5325 |
|
% |
5326 |
|
\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}% |
5327 |
|
}} |
5328 |
|
|
5329 |
|
% Set default to letter. |
5330 |
|
% |
5331 |
|
\letterpaper |
5332 |
|
|
5333 |
|
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.} |
5334 |
|
|
5335 |
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. |
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text. |
5336 |
\catcode`\"=\other |
\catcode`\"=\other |
5367 |
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. |
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text. |
5368 |
|
|
5369 |
\catcode`\"=\active |
\catcode`\"=\active |
5370 |
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt \char '042}} |
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}} |
5371 |
\let"=\activedoublequote |
\let"=\activedoublequote |
5372 |
\catcode`\~=\active |
\catcode`\~=\active |
5373 |
\def~{{\tt \char '176}} |
\def~{{\tt\char126}} |
5374 |
\chardef\hat=`\^ |
\chardef\hat=`\^ |
5375 |
\catcode`\^=\active |
\catcode`\^=\active |
|
\def\auxhat{\def^{'hat}} |
|
5376 |
\def^{{\tt \hat}} |
\def^{{\tt \hat}} |
5377 |
|
|
5378 |
\catcode`\_=\active |
\catcode`\_=\active |
5379 |
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} |
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_} |
5380 |
% Subroutine for the previous macro. |
% Subroutine for the previous macro. |
5381 |
\def\_{\lvvmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} |
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}} |
|
|
|
|
% \lvvmode is equivalent in function to \leavevmode. |
|
|
% Using \leavevmode runs into trouble when written out to |
|
|
% an index file due to the expansion of \leavevmode into ``\unhbox |
|
|
% \voidb@x'' ---which looks to TeX like ``\unhbox \voidb\x'' due to our |
|
|
% magic tricks with @. |
|
|
\def\lvvmode{\vbox to 0pt{}} |
|
5382 |
|
|
5383 |
\catcode`\|=\active |
\catcode`\|=\active |
5384 |
\def|{{\tt \char '174}} |
\def|{{\tt\char124}} |
5385 |
\chardef \less=`\< |
\chardef \less=`\< |
5386 |
\catcode`\<=\active |
\catcode`\<=\active |
5387 |
\def<{{\tt \less}} |
\def<{{\tt \less}} |
5397 |
{\catcode`\==\active |
{\catcode`\==\active |
5398 |
\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}} |
\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}} |
5399 |
|
|
5400 |
|
\catcode`+=\active |
5401 |
|
\catcode`\_=\active |
5402 |
|
|
5403 |
|
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file |
5404 |
|
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line. |
5405 |
|
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on. |
5406 |
|
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file. |
5407 |
|
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other} |
5408 |
|
|
5409 |
\catcode`\@=0 |
\catcode`\@=0 |
5410 |
|
|
5411 |
% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font |
% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font |
5448 |
@let>=@normalgreater |
@let>=@normalgreater |
5449 |
@let+=@normalplus} |
@let+=@normalplus} |
5450 |
|
|
5451 |
|
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily. |
5452 |
|
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash. |
5453 |
|
@otherifyactive |
5454 |
|
|
5455 |
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. |
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up. |
5456 |
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing |
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing |
5457 |
% a backslash. |
% a backslash. |
5462 |
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then |
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then |
5463 |
% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix |
% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix |
5464 |
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. |
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur. |
5465 |
|
% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input |
5466 |
|
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format. |
5467 |
% |
% |
5468 |
@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi} |
@gdef@fixbackslash{@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi |
5469 |
|
@catcode`+=@active @catcode`@_=@active} |
5470 |
|
|
5471 |
%% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below |
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special. The @rm below |
5472 |
%% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10 |
% makes sure that the current font starts out as the newly loaded cmr10 |
5473 |
@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other |
@catcode`@$=@other @catcode`@%=@other @catcode`@&=@other @catcode`@#=@other |
5474 |
|
|
5475 |
@textfonts |
@textfonts |
5476 |
@rm |
@rm |
5477 |
|
|
5478 |
@c Local variables: |
@c Local variables: |
5479 |
|
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp) |
5480 |
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" |
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message" |
5481 |
|
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{" |
5482 |
|
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d" |
5483 |
|
@c time-stamp-end: "}" |
5484 |
@c End: |
@c End: |